OWNER’S MANUAL
2021 WRANGLER
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................................................................9
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................107
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................134
5 MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................210
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................284
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................344
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................360
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................431
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................443
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................447
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key..........................................................10
ROLLOVER WARNING .........................................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........11
Symbol Glossary ...................................................11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................16
Key Fob......................................................... 16
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................18
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................19
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................19
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ...20
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 21
To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 22
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If
Equipped ...................................................... 22
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped .....................................................22
Remote Start Cancel Message ................... 23
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ........23
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 23
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...24
To Arm The System ..................................... 24
To Disarm The System ................................ 25
Rearming Of The System.............................25
DOORS .................................................................. 25
Manual Door Locks...................................... 25
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ............... 26
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If
Equipped) .................................................... 26
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 29
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors ............................................................ 29
Front Door Removal .................................... 30
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) ... 32
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 33
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 33
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ....... 34
SEATS ................................................................... 34
Manual Adjustment Front Seats................. 35
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door
Models.......................................................... 36
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door
Models.......................................................... 37
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 38
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped ............... 39
Head Restraints........................................... 40
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION....................... 42
Introducing Voice Recognition .................... 42
Basic Voice Commands............................... 43
Get Started................................................... 43
Additional Information................................. 43
MIRRORS ..............................................................44
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 44
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................... 44
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 45
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 45
Power Mirrors — If Equipped....................... 45
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ...........................45
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.................................................. 46
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....... 46
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 46
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener................................................. 47
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ................................. 48
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................... 48
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 48
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................49
Headlight Switch..........................................49
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped .....................................................49
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 50
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped .................................50
Flash-To-Pass ............................................... 50
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........50
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 50
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ................... 51
Turn Signals ................................................. 51
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 51
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................51
Interior Courtesy Lights ............................... 51
Dimmer Controls.......................................... 52
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............52
Windshield Wiper Operation ...................... 52
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If
Equipped ...................................................... 53
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................54
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions ..............................................54
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions......................................................57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ...................................................... 59
Climate Voice Commands ...........................60
Operating Tips ............................................. 60
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 62
Storage ......................................................... 62
USB/AUX Control ......................................... 62
Power Outlets .............................................. 64
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 65
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ............... 66
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED .................. 67
Auto-Down Feature ..................................... 68
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 68
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 68
WRANGLER TOPS ............................................... 68
Provided Tools ............................................. 68
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
Position......................................................... 69
Raising The Soft Top.................................... 80
Removing The Soft Top ............................... 83
Installing The Soft Top................................. 85
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal .............. 87
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation .......... 91
Removing The Hard Top.............................. 91
Installing The Hard Top ............................... 93
Power Sliding Top — If Equipped ................ 94
DOOR FRAME ...................................................... 97
Door Frame Removal .................................. 98
Door Frame Installation Four Door
Models — If Equipped.................................. 99
Door Frame Installation Two Door
Models — If Equipped................................100
FOLDING WINDSHIELD .................................... 100
Lowering The Windshield ..........................101
Raising The Windshield.............................103
HOOD................................................................... 104
Opening The Hood.....................................104
Closing The Hood.......................................104
REAR SWING GATE ........................................... 104
Cargo Area Features .................................105
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .......... 105
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................................... 107
Instrument Cluster Descriptions...............111
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .................... 111
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ......................................................112
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped ...............113
Instrument Cluster Display Menu
Items ..........................................................113
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................117
Diesel Displays ..........................................118
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Messages ..................................................118
Fuel System Messages .............................119
4
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 122
Red Warning Lights....................................122
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................125
Yellow Indicator Lights...............................129
Green Indicator Lights ...............................130
White Indicator Lights................................131
Blue Indicator Lights..................................131
Gray Indicator Lights..................................132
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .... 132
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................132
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................ 132
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................... 134
Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......134
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...134
Normal Starting .........................................134
AutoPark.....................................................135
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) ......................................................137
If Engine Fails To Start ..............................137
After Starting ..............................................137
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE (IF
EQUIPPED) ..........................................................137
Automatic Transmission............................138
Extreme Cold Weather ..............................138
Normal Starting..........................................138
Starting Fluids............................................139
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE........139
Cold Weather Precautions ........................140
Engine Idling ..............................................141
Stopping The Engine .................................141
Cooling System Tips — Automatic
Transmission..............................................142
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED .......143
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ..................143
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ........................144
PARKING BRAKE................................................144
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED......145
Shifting .......................................................146
Downshifting ..............................................147
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................................................148
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................149
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System .......................................................149
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission ....149
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ................. 154
Four-Position Transfer Case — If
Equipped ...................................................154
Five-Position Transfer Case — If
Equipped ....................................................157
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ............159
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear — If
Equipped ...................................................159
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only — If
Equipped ...................................................160
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If
Equipped ...................................................161
Off Road+ — If Equipped ...........................162
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING ..... 163
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ...................... 163
Autostop Mode ..........................................164
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................164
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode ..........................................................165
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System........................................................165
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System........................................................166
System Malfunction...................................166
5
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................... 166
Autostop Mode...........................................166
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................167
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode...........................................................167
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System........................................................168
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System........................................................168
System Malfunction...................................168
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 168
Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................168
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped ....................................................170
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ........................................................... 179
ParkSense Sensors ...................................180
ParkSense Warning Display ......................180
ParkSense Display.....................................180
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........182
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System........................................................183
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............183
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....183
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 184
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED................ 185
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ENGINE (IF
EQUIPPED) ..........................................................187
Fuel Filler Cap ............................................187
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................188
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE (IF
EQUIPPED) ..........................................................188
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel................188
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel...............189
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................189
VEHICLE LOADING .............................................192
Certification Label .....................................192
TRAILER TOWING ..............................................193
Common Towing Definitions .....................193
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................195
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................195
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................196
Towing Requirements................................196
Towing Tips.................................................198
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ....................................................199
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................199
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................200
DRIVING TIPS......................................................201
On-Road Driving Tips .................................201
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................202
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 210
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 210
UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 211
Customer Programmable Features .........211
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.............................. 225
System Overview ......................................225
Drag & Drop Menu Bar..............................227
Safety And General Information ...............227
UCONNECT MODES ........................................... 228
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................228
Radio Mode ...............................................229
Media Mode ..............................................238
Phone Mode ..............................................241
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED........................................................... 252
Android Auto™ ..........................................252
Apple CarPlay®..........................................254
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks...................................................256
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 257
Is My Vehicle Connected?.........................257
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................257
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................259
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ......................261
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account ......................................................275
6
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 275
Connected Services SOS FAQs ................275
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Unlock FAQs ..............................................276
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs ...........................................................276
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....276
Connected Services Vehicle Finder
FAQs ...........................................................276
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs ........................................277
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs ...........................................................277
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights
FAQs............................................................278
Connected Services Account FAQs...........278
Data Collection & Privacy ..........................280
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 281
Regulatory And Safety Information...........281
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ................. 281
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ......................282
Drivetrain ...................................................282
Accessory Gauge .......................................283
Pitch & Roll ................................................283
TrailCam — If Equipped..............................283
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................284
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................284
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...285
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.........................293
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped ...................................................293
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped............................297
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................................300
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..................305
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....305
Important Safety Precautions...................305
Seat Belt Systems .....................................305
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...312
Child Restraints .........................................326
SAFETY TIPS .......................................................341
Transporting Passengers ..........................341
Transporting Pets ......................................341
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................341
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................342
Exhaust Gas ...............................................343
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................343
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 344
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 344
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...................... 348
Preparations For Jacking .........................348
Jack Location ............................................348
Spare Tire Removal ..................................349
Jacking Instructions...................................349
JUMP STARTING ............................................... 352
Preparations For Jump Start.....................352
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................354
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 355
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................. 356
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 357
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 357
Four Wheel Drive Models..........................358
Without The Key Fob .................................359
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .....359
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 359
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 359
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE ............................................................... 360
Maintenance Plan......................................361
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE .. 364
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To B5
Biodiesel.....................................................365
Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20
Biodiesel.....................................................367
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 368
2.0L Gasoline Engine ...............................368
3.6L Gasoline Engine ...............................369
3.0L Diesel Engine.....................................370
Checking Oil Level......................................371
Adding Washer Fluid..................................371
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................371
Pressure Washing......................................372
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................................. 372
Engine Oil ..................................................372
Engine Oil Filter..........................................373
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................374
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine .............................................375
Fuel Filter Replacement — Diesel
Engine.........................................................376
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of
Fuel — Diesel Engine ................................378
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow .............................378
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................379
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............379
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................380
Body Lubrication........................................382
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................382
Exhaust System ........................................384
Cooling System ..........................................385
Brake System ............................................389
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................390
Transfer Case ............................................390
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........390
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...391
Fuses .........................................................392
Bulb Replacement .....................................400
TIRES ..................................................................404
Tire Safety Information..............................404
Tires — General Information .....................410
Tire Types ...................................................415
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................415
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................417
Snow Traction Devices .............................418
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............419
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................................420
Treadwear ..................................................420
Traction Grades .........................................420
Temperature Grades .................................420
STORING THE VEHICLE......................................421
BODYWORK ........................................................422
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......422
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........422
Preserving The Bodywork..........................422
INTERIORS ......................................................... 424
Carpet Safety Information.........................424
Carpet Removal .........................................425
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................429
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................430
Leather Surfaces .......................................430
Glass Surfaces ..........................................430
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ............... 431
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................. 431
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 431
Torque Specifications................................431
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE
ENGINE................................................................ 432
2.0L Engine................................................432
3.6L Engine................................................432
Reformulated Gasoline .............................433
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................433
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................433
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles......................................................433
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..434
MMT In Gasoline........................................434
Fuel System Cautions................................434
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ...... 434
Diesel Fuel Specifications.........................435
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements....................435
8
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 437
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................. 438
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............. 442
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 443
Prepare For The Appointment...................443
Prepare A List.............................................443
Be Reasonable With Requests .................443
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................443
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................443
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...........443
Mexico ........................................................443
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............444
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................444
Service Contract .......................................444
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 445
MOPAR® PARTS ............................................... 445
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 445
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................445
In Canada...................................................445
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 445
General Information.......................................... 446
9
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 201.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All
data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of
the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
1
10
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center
of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better
in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if
this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe
or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major
cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that
the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death
toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
WARNING!
These statements are against operating proce-
dures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information per-
taining to the topic.
11
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 111.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 122
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 122
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 123
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 123
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning
Light
Ú page 123
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 123
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 124
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 124
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 124
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 124
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 123
Red Warning Lights
1
12
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
Ú page 124
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 124
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 125
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 125
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 125
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 126
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 126
Red Warning Lights
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 126
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 126
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 126
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure Warn-
ing Light — If Equipped
Ú page 127
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 127
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 127
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 127
Yellow Warning Lights
13
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 127
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Ú page 127
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warn-
ing Light
Ú page 127
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Yellow Warning Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 129
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
14
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA)
Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Tar-
get Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 130
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Yellow Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 130
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 131
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 131
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 131
2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped With A
Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 131
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 131
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 131
Green Indicator Lights
15
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 131
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 131
White Indicator Lights
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 131
Gray Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 132
1
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows
you to lock or unlock the doors and swing gate
from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
fob also contains a mechanical key.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked
if the key fob is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device.
This may result in poor performance.
With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at
2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only
with the key fob facing away from your body,
especially your eyes and objects that may be
damaged, such as clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key
fob may be damaged if the key fob is sub-
jected to strong electrical shocks. In order to
ensure complete efficiency of the electronic
devices inside of the key fob, avoid exposing
the key fob to direct sunlight.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Key Fob
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key
fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or
by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob
button pushes, then the key fob battery
requires replacement.
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may
be harmful to the environment. Please see
an authorized dealer for proper battery
disposal Ú page 446.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to
unlock all the doors and swing gate. To lock all
the doors, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button through the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 211.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2450.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will
be indicated on the vehicle’s instrument
cluster, and the fob LED will no longer illumi-
nate with a button press.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — LED Indicator
3 — Unlock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Panic Button
6 — Lock Button
2
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the back cover of the fob by
inserting a flat-blade screw driver into the
slot on the bottom of the fob. Pry until the
cover unsnaps being careful not to
damage the seal. Proceed
counter-clockwise to pry the remaining
snaps until the battery cover can be
removed.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a
small flat-blade screwdriver into the battery
removal slot and sliding the battery forward
and up being careful not to damage the
electronic board underneath.
Battery Replacement
3. Install the new battery into the key fob,
making sure the positive (+) side is facing
up. Slide the battery until it is seated
securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it
is properly aligned before snapping it back
in place.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off
in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to
start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key Ú page 446.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,
alarm, etc.) are available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — RUN
2
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of the START/STOP ignition button, the
key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In
this situation, a backup method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of
the key fob (side with the mechanical flip key)
against the START/STOP ignition button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
Information on normal starting Ú page 134.
When opening the driver's door with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position (engine not
running), a chime will sound to remind you to
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-
tion to the chime, the message will display
“Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehi-
cle and lock all doors when leaving the vehi-
cle unattended.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with
Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range Ú page 446.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors and swing gate will lock, the turn
signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp
twice. Pushing the Remote Start button again
will shut the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Swing gate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
All removable doors must not be removed
Malfunction Indicator Light not illuminated
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, either push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the vehicle security system
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems
— If Equipped” in the next section for detailed
operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed
in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 211. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when the remote start is activated and
is programmed in the comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on
the outside ambient temperature. When the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation
on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 54.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start, or until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. The climate control
settings will change, and exit the automatic
defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in remote start mode. This
includes turning the climate controls off using
the OFF button.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Swing Gate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with
Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and the
key fob may reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the
Wait To Start Indicator Light Ú page 122 to
extinguish before cranking the engine. This
allows time for the engine pre-heat cycle to
pre-heat the cylinder air, and is normal in
cold weather.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors and swing gate will lock, the turn
signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp
twice. Pushing the Remote Start button again
will shut the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Swing gate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illumi-
nated
Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks are disabled. The
Vehicle Security system provides both audible
and visible signals. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide
the following audible and visible signals: the
horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the vehicle security light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position
Ú
page 134.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 26.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
(Continued)
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if
equipped) Ú page 26.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5
seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the
trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security system will rearm itself.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
All doors are equipped with an interior
rocker-type door lock lever. To lock a door when
leaving your vehicle, push the rocker lever
forward to the lock position and close the door.
To unlock the door, push the rocker lever
rearward.
Manual Door Lock
NOTE:
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or
unlock the doors, swing gate (if equipped with a
lock), glove compartment, and console storage.
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the remov-
able door panels may damage the seals,
causing water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-
rior.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in
a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
drive, as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
2
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switch is located on each
front door panel. Push the switch forward to
unlock the doors, and rearward to lock the
doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) and swing gate without having to push
the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
within the Uconnect Settings Ú page 211.
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may interfere
When exiting the vehicle, always switch off
the ignition and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause severe personal injuries
and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in
a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
drive, as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always switch off
the ignition and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause severe personal injuries
and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the Passive Entry system from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever time duration
is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm
the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock
all doors and the swing gate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlock” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’s door handle. You can select
between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press” within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 211.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function only if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with a
START/STOP ignition. There are three situations
that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive
entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and
alert the customer. If Passive Entry is disabled
using Uconnect system, the key protection
described in this section remains active/
functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a
FOBIK-Safe operation when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
A second valid passive entry key fob is
detected outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of a passive entry door handle).
2
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch, and then the
doors are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, pushing the passive entry
lock button will lock the vehicle doors and the
swing gate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior
door panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate
The swing gate Passive Entry unlock feature is
built into the swing gate handle. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
swing gate handle, grab the swing gate handle
to unlock the swing gate automatically, and pull
the swing gate to open.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors & the swing gate will unlock when you
grab hold of the swing gate handle. You can
select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 211.
Swing Gate Passive Entry Lock Button
To Lock The Swing Gate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the swing gate handle, pushing the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle
doors and the swing gate.
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using any Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Uconnect Settings, the key protection
described in "Frequency Operated Button
Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/
functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted Ú page 446.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default
condition is enabled. When enabled, the door
locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled by an authorized dealer per written
request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or mechanical key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock lever rearward (located on the
door trim panel), roll down the window and
open the door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli-
sion. Remember that the rear doors can only
be opened from the outside when the Child-
Protection locks are engaged (locked).
2
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
Door Removal Warning Label
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the
doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see
an authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-
mounted outside mirror. Federal law requires
outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during
door reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb /
10 N·m). For off-road driving tips, see
Ú page 202.
When front doors are removed, the message
“Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
Power Mirrors and Power Door Locks will also
be unavailable.
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door
under the instrument panel by sliding the
plastic panel along the door frame toward
the seats until the tabs are detached.
Wiring Access Door
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the protec-
tion they can provide. This procedure is fur-
nished for use during off-road operation only.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during
off-road operation with doors removed. For
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 202.
Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury
in the event of an accident.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE:
Do not pry back to open, as this will break the
plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the
wiring harness.
Closed Wiring Harness
5. Push and hold down the black security tab
under the wiring harness, and lift the
harness into the open position.
Open Wiring Harness
6. With the wiring harness open, pull
downward on the wiring connector to
unplug. Store the wiring connector in the
lower door basket.
7. Remove the check screw from the center
door check (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
Door Check (Detached)
8. With the door open, lift the door with the
help of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
used to assist in guiding the door into place
when reinstalling.
1 – Locking Tab
2 – Wiring Harness
1 – Wiring Harness
2 – Black Security Tab
2
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
REAR DOOR REMOVAL (FOUR-DOOR
M
ODELS)
Door Removal Warning Label
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during
door reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb /
10 N·m). For off-road driving tips, see
Ú page 202.
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring
access door from the bottom of the B-pillar.
Wiring Access Door
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the protec-
tion they can provide. This procedure is fur-
nished for use during off-road operation only.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during
off-road operation with doors removed. For
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 202.
Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury
in the event of an accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring
harness. This will unlock the connector tab,
allowing the wiring connector to be unplugged.
Wiring Connector
6. Remove the check screw from the center
door check (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
Door Check (Attached)
7. With the door open, lift the door with the
help of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
used to assist in guiding the door into place
when reinstalling.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located on the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control
handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
2
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the
control handle upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
E
QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 22.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering column while driv-
ing or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con-
trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn-
ing may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT SEATS
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward
by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat,
lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion
and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the
desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Adjustment Bar Location
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or
lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located
on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on
the handle to raise the seat, push downward on
the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes
may be necessary to achieve the desired
position.
Seat Height Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and
lean forward or backward, depending on the
direction you would like the seatback to move.
Release the strap when the desired position is
reached and the seatback will lock into place.
Recline Strap
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
2
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support
The lumbar control knob is located on the
outboard side of the front driver seat. Rotate
the control forward to increase and rearward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar
support.
Lumbar Control Knob
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two
Door Models
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on
the outboard side of the seat back, and slide
the entire seat forward.
Easy Entry Lever
To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the
seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
rearward until the track locks.
NOTE:
The front passenger seats have a track
memory, which returns the seat to its original
position.
The recline strap and easy entry lever should
not be used during the automatic returning of
the seat to its sitting position.
60/40 SPLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT —
F
OUR DOOR MODELS
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat to allow for extended
cargo space.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seat to fold down easily.
The center head restraints must be in the
lowest position to avoid contact with the
center console when folding the seat.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
There are two release levers located on each
upper outboard side of the rear seat. The larger
of the two release levers folds down the seat
and the head restraint simultaneously. The
smaller lever folds down the head restraint
independently for improved visibility.
To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release
lever and slowly fold down the seatback. The
head restraint will fold automatically with the
seat when this lever is pulled.
Seatback Release Lever
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal. By simply opening the seats to
the open position, the seat cushion will return to
its normal shape over time.
To Raise The Rear Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then,
raise the head restraint until it locks into place.
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have
difficulty returning the seat to its proper
position.
FOLD AND TUMBLE REAR SEAT — TWO
D
OOR MODELS
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to reposition the front seats.
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seat to fold down easily.
Folding The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the
seatback forward.
Rear Seatback Release Lever
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Retention Straps
1. There are two retention straps located on
the back of the rear seat and two
corresponding wire loops located on the
back of each B-pillar. Open the
hook-and-loop fastener on the strap and
thread through the wire loop. Fold the
hook-and-loop fastener over to keep the
seat in the folded position. This should be
done on both sides.
Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap
2. To return the seat to its normal upright
position, reverse these steps.
Removing The Rear Seat
1. Push down on the release bar on each
side, and pull the seat out and away from
the lower bracket.
Release Bar Location
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse these
steps.
NOTE:
Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching the
rear seat latches.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The heated seat control buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen and also in the Climate Control
touchscreen menu.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure that the seats are fully latched.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Heated Seat Buttons
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 22.
REAR SEAT ARMREST — IF EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be
used as a rear armrest with cupholders. To
unfold it, grab the pull strap under the head
restraint and pull it forward.
Rear Seat Armrest
NOTE:
The cupholder liner can be removed for
cleaning.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint. The release button does
not need to be pushed to adjust the head
restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust
it to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180
degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt
to gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable,
but foldable head restraints.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the
release strap located on the upper outboard
side of each rear seat.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Location
Rear Head Restraints Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward
position, lift up on the head restraint until it
locks into place.
For information on child seat tether routing
Ú page 305.
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable,
but foldable, outboard head restraints, as well
as an adjustable, removable center head
restraint.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the
inner release lever, located on the upper part of
the rear seat.
Rear Head Restraint Lever
Rear Head Restraint Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward
position, lift up on the head restraint until it
locks into place.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear
seat head restraints installed while passen-
gers are occupying the rear seat. In a colli-
sion, people riding in this area without the
head restraints installed are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the reinstallation instruc-
tions above prior to operating the vehicle or
occupying a seat.
2
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the
head restraint. To lower the center head
restraint, push the adjustment button, located
at the base of the head restraint, and push
down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, push the
release button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and pull upward on the head restraint.
To install the head restraint, hold the release
button while pushing downward on the head
restraint. For information on child seat tether
routing Ú page 305.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact
with the center console when folding the seat
down.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear
seat head restraints installed while passen-
gers are occupying the rear seat. In a colli-
sion, people riding in this area without the
head restraints installed are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the reinstallation instruc-
tions above prior to operating the vehicle or
occupying a seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 446.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
3 — Push To End Call
2
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 211.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Vanity Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-
ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly
onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a
clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
Outside Rearview Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 54.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the
door panel next to the door handle.
Power Mirror Switch
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L
(left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the
mirror to move.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas-
senger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side mirror could
cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the passenger side mirror.
2
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting, or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity system is active Ú page 446.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional
buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
2
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink®
to a miscellaneous device follows the same
procedure as programming to a garage door
opener Ú page 47.
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code before beginning the
programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some US gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure
may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine if the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code or a non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all
remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel lights, interior lights, and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light, and instrument panel light
operation.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights are in a dedicated
position below the headlight assembly. DRLs
are active when the low beams are not on, and
the engine is running. DRLs may be deactivated
by applying the parking brake.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
1 — Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Fog Light Switch
2
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. The lever will return to the centered
position. To return the headlights to low beam,
pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or push
the lever toward the instrument panel.
Multifunction Lever
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automatically controlling the high
beams through the use of a camera mounted
on the vehicle’s header. This camera detects
vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto High Beam” within your
Uconnect Settings Ú page 211, as well as
turning the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion and placing the multifunction lever in the
high beam position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the last detent for automatic
headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This
means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound when the driver’s
door is opened.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the
parking lights or low beam headlights and push
the fog light switch. Pushing the fog light switch
a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the dimmer
controls on the headlight switch fully upward,
or, if equipped, when the unlock button is
pushed on the key fob.
The interior courtesy lights are located in the
center of the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of
one large center light and four smaller reading
lights. Each reading light can be turned on by
pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second
time will turn the light off.
Dome Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are
on, rotating the dimmer control to the extreme
bottom position will cause all the interior lights
to turn off. This is also known as “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging
the vehicle’s battery.
2
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DIMMER CONTROLS
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight
switch and are located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
interior and ambient light levels (e.g. courtesy
lights in the footwell and front door handles).
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located at the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever (If Equipped With
Rear Wipers)
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of
the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Windshield/Intermittent Wiper Operation
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable.
Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of four intermittent settings.
The delay cycle can be set anywhere between
1 to 18 seconds.
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the delay range, the wiper will start and
continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles
after the lever is released. Then, the
intermittent interval previously selected will
resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the
wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles.
Then, the wipers will turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the washer will
resume normal operation.
Mist
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a
single wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held
up, the wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 382.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER — IF
E
QUIPPED
A rotary switch on the center portion of the
windshield wiper/washer lever controls the
operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the switch upward to the first
detent position for intermittent
operation and to the second detent
for continuous rear wiper operation.
Push the wiper lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear
washer. The washer pump and wiper
will continue to operate as long as the
lever is held.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
2
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the washer will
resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “park” position.
When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate
Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance. The button illuminates when MAX
A/C is on. In MAX A/C, the blower level and
mode position can be adjusted to desired user
settings. Pressing other settings will cause the
MAX A/C to turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
(Continued)
The A/C button allows the operator to manually
activate or deactivate the A/C system. When the
A/C system is turned on, cool dehumidified air
will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the system
between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and
press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency. You can press and
release this button on the touchscreen, or push
the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on.
The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is
on. Toggling this function will cause the system
to switch between manual mode and automatic
mode. Ú page 59
Front Defrost Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the climate system returns to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
2
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Climate Control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the Climate
Control system. Adjusting the blower
will cause automatic mode to switch
to manual operation. There are seven blower
speeds available. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise
from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large
blower icon to increase the blower setting.
The blower can also be selected by pressing
the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select one of the Mode buttons on the
touchscreen or press the Mode
button on the faceplate to adjust the
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution can be adjusted so air comes from
the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION! (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push the OFF
button on the faceplate to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Climate
Controls
MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped
Set the temperature control knob to
the MAX A/C setting to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. Moving the temperature control
knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the recirculation button on the
faceplate to change the system
between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator (if equipped)
illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when
2
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes except for Defrost.
Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions
exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if
equipped), the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the
Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes
from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the Defrost
button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The
Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature
of the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you
turn the temperature control knob
clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you
turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Heater Only
Turning the temperature control knob clockwise
increases the heating temperature and turning
the temperature control knob counterclockwise
decreases the heating temperature.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Climate Control system.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION! (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
system. There are seven blower
speeds available. The blower speeds
increase as you turn the blower control knob
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn
the blower control knob to the OFF (O)
position.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
2
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 211.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to
70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 421.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control
system may automatically adjust airflow to
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is
activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is
active, the de-icer timer and operation will
continue.
Operating Tips Chart
NOTE:
The below chart is for Manual Override Opera-
tion.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to the (Panel
Mode) position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode) posi-
tion.
Cool & Humid Condi-
tions
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode)
and turn (A/C) on
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the (Floor
Mode) position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
(Mix Mode) position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Glove Compartment
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower
storage compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, lift the
top latch. To access the lower storage
compartment, lift the bottom latch.
Console Storage Latches
Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The rear cargo area storage compartment is
located underneath the load floor.
To access the storage compartment, lift up on
the cargo strap at the rear of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Cover
USB/AUX CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument
panel, below the climate controls. Behind the
media hub access door, the Media Hub
contains one AUX port, a Type C USB Port and
one standard USB port. Both USB ports allow
you to play music from MP3 players /
smartphones or USB devices through the
vehicle’s sound system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to "Android Auto™" or "Apple Carplay®"
Ú page 252 or in the Owner's Manual
Supplement.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove com-
partment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in
injury in a collision.
1 — Upper Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Compartment Latch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to
your device up to an hour after the vehicle is
turned off.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same
time and both ports will provide charging
capabilities. Only one port can transfer data
to the system at a time. A pop-up will appear
and allow you to select the device transfer-
ring data.
Both ports share a single data connection.
The user cannot switch between Type A or
Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A USB port and another device is plugged into
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and
allow you to select which device to use.
Media Hub
Located inside the center console, a second
USB port allows you to play music from USB
devices through your vehicle’s sound system.
Third and fourth USB ports (if equipped) are
located behind the center console, above the
power inverter. One is a charge only port, and
can only charge USB devices. The other USB
port allows you to play music from USB devices
through your vehicle’s sound system.
USB On The Back Of The Center Console
When a new device or smartphone is plugged
into the USB ports, the following message may
display depending on the device being utilized:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device
to use the second device”.
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
1 — Type C And Standard USB USB Ports
2 — Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports
2
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power
outlets that can provide power for accessories
designed for use with the standard power outlet
adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of
the instrument panel below the climate
controls, and is powered from the ignition
switch. Power is available when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
Front Power Outlet
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer,
there is a second power outlet located in the
rear cargo area and is powered directly from the
vehicle battery.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Power Outlets Fuse Locations
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in a collision.
1 — F43 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (bat-
tery powered at all times)
2 — F45 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (pow-
ered when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or
ACC position)
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is
exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current.
This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain video
game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Power Inverter
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
2
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power
rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the
power inverter may have to be reset manually.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower
switch bank of the instrument panel can be
used to power various electrical devices. You
have the ability to configure the functionality of
the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 211.
All switches can be configured as follows:
Switch type operation: Latching or Momen-
tary
Power source: Battery or Ignition
Ability to hold last state across key cycles: On
or Off
Auxiliary Switches
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when
switch type is set to latching and power source
is set to ignition.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that
power four blunt cut wires. These wires are
located under the instrument panel in the
passenger compartment and under the hood to
the right, near the battery.
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a
fused battery wire and ignition wire are also
located in the interior, in the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided
with the auxiliary switches to aid in the
connection/installation of your electrical devices.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Wire Color Chart
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power window switches are located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the switch downward to open the window
and upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window
and the top right switch controls the right front
window.
Power Window Switches
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &
Underhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &
Underhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &
Underhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &
Underhood (right side near battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power win-
dows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
2
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after ignition is placed in
the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear
passenger window, and the lower right switch
controls the right rear passenger window.
NOTE:
There are window switches located on the rear
of the center console for the rear passenger
windows in the four-door model.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power and the passenger door
power window switches have an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch down, for a
short period of time, and release and the
window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch allows you to disable
the window controls on the rear passenger
doors. To disable the window controls, rotate
the switch downward. To enable the window
controls, rotate the switch upward.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized by adjusting the window opening.
WRANGLER TOPS
PROVIDED TOOLS
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with
your vehicle located in the center console. This
kit includes the necessary tools required for the
operations described in the following sections.
All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use.
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used
independently. Your vehicle warranty will not
cover damage resulting from both tops being
installed at the same time.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Provided Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top (four
door models only), the soft top system will be
provided in a separate box located in the rear of
the vehicle for shipping purposes only.
LOWERING THE SOFT TOP INTO
S
UNRIDER® POSITION
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
the top has been folded down for a period of
time, the top will appear to have shrunk when
you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is
caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl or
acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily
on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its
original size and the top can then be installed. If
the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not
attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or
side curtains.
1 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
2 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
3 — 15 mm Socket
4 — Ratchet
WARNING!
The fabric quarter windows and fabric top
are designed only for protection against the
elements. Do not rely on them to contain
occupants within the vehicle or to protect
against injury during an accident.
Remember, always wear seat belts.
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of
all pinch points when installing and
removing the soft tops. The lift assist mech-
anism and side bows may cause serious
injury if fingers or hands get caught in
between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any addi-
tional loads such as roof racks, spare tires,
building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/
or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a
structural member of the vehicle and, thus,
cannot properly carry any additional loads
other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
2
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not run a fabric top through an auto-
matic car wash. Window scratches and wax
build up may result.
Do not lower the top when the temperature
is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top
may result.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame, or fully lowered.
Do not fully lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may
occur.
For important information on cleaning and
caring for your vehicle's fabric top
Ú page 423.
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to
pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or
retainers securing the soft top. Do not force
or pry the soft top framework when opening
or closing. Damage to the top may result.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on
the top material:
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the soft
top may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The soft top must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's inte-
rior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Four Door Side View Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Rear Quarter Window
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Front Window Retainer
5 — #5 Bow
2
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Two Door Side View Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Rear Quarter Window
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Front Window Retainer
5 — #5 Bow
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Two And Four Door Rear Components
1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
2
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All lowering and raising the soft top instruc-
tions are applicable to both two and four door
model vehicles.
Images shown are of four door models, and
appearance of two door model components
may differ.
The following options are available to you when
lowering your vehicle’s soft top:
Sunrider® position with rear and quarter
windows installed
Sunrider® position with rear and quarter
panels removed
Sunrider® position with rear window
installed and quarter panels removed
Fully lowered position with rear and quarter
windows removed
Both quarter windows should be removed and
installed together.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the
crossbar by pulling the handle downward.
Make sure the hook is disengaged from its
receiver.
Step Two
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on
the #1 Bow of the soft top to start the
operation.
Step Three
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the
side link to fold the soft top rearward into
the Sunrider® position.
Step Four
NOTE:
If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider® position,
secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Step Four
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider®
position with the rear window and quarter
panel assemblies fully installed or completely
removed.
The rear window and rear quarter windows
must be removed before fully lowering the
soft top to prevent damage to the top. Clean
the side and rear windows before removal to
assist in preventing scratching during
removal of the soft top. If the plastic retainers
are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc.,
clean them with a mild soap solution and a
small brush. Cleaning products are available
through an authorized dealer.
Removing The Soft Top Windows
NOTE:
Before fully lowering the soft top, the rear
window and rear quarter windows must be
removed.
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear
window’s plastic retainers from the lower
right and left corners.
Step One
2. Grab the swing gate bar, rotate it outward
and upward releasing it from both the right
and left retainers.
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
3. While holding the window in place, slide the
swing gate bar to the left separating it from
the rear window. Store in soft window bag (if
equipped), or a safe location.
Step Three
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both
quarter window pillars.
Step Four
2
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to
the left until it is completely separate from
its retainer. Do not pull downward while
removing the rear window. Damage to the
retainer could result.
Step Five
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom
corner outward and release tab from the
bottom of the window pillar.
Step One
2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at
the upper front corner of each quarter
window.
Step Two
3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove
plastic retainer from along the bottom of the
window moving toward the front of the
vehicle.
Step Three
4. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to
the top of the front window.
Step Four
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
5. While keeping the window level, slide
rearward until it is completely separate from
its retainer. Do not pull downward while
removing the window. Damage to the
retainer could result.
Step Five
6. Store in soft window bag (if equipped) or a
safe location.
NOTE:
For information on the use of the storage bag,
refer to the next section.
Soft Top Window Storage Bag — If
Equipped
To safely store the soft top rear window, and
rear quarter windows, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
The swing gate bar, once removed from the rear
window, does not store in the soft window
storage bag (if equipped).
1. With the bag opened completely, fold both
fabric dividers downward and lay the first
quarter window all the way to the right side
with the inside of the window facing
downward and the window pillar to the
outside.
NOTE:
The quarter windows are marked “1” and “2” on
the inside of the window pillar.
Step One
Step One
2. Fold the first divider upward, covering the
first quarter window.
Step Two
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Both Dividers Folded Down
2
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lay the second quarter window on top of the
first divider all the way to the left side with
the inside of the window facing downward
and the window pillar to the outside.
Step Three
4. Fold the second divider upward, covering
the second quarter window.
Step Four
5. Lay the rear window on top of the second
divider.
Step Five
6. Close the storage bag and store in a safe
location.
Step Six
Lowering The Soft Top All The Way
1. Remove the rear window and quarter panel
windows
Ú
page 75.
2. From the Sunrider® position Ú page 69,
remove straps if previously secured and
move to the rear of the vehicle.
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Second Divider Folded Down
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
3. Locate the Sunrider® latch beneath the #6
Bow of the soft top on the left side.
Step Three
4. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow
the soft top to slide rearward freely in the
guide tracks to the stowed position.
Step Four
5. While pushing downward slightly on the
folded soft top, slide the lock lever on the
left and right side lift assist mechanisms to
the “lock” position.
Step Five (Locked Position)
6. Once the lock lever is in the “lock” position,
push downward on each side of the folded
soft top to ensure it is secure. An audible
“click” may be heard.
Step Six
NOTE:
Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Step Six
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
2
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAISING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered
Position
1. From the fully lowered position, remove
straps if previously secured.
2. While pushing down on the rear of the top,
slide the lock lever on the left and right side
lift assist mechanisms to the “unlock”
position.
Step Two
3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along
the guide track until it locks into the
Sunrider® position with an audible “click”.
Step Three
4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to
ensure the top is locked in the Sunrider®
position.
5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top
toward the front of the vehicle manually
guiding the top into the closed position.
Step Five
Step Five
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
1 — Unlocked Position
2 — #5 Bow Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on
the header latch downward to engage the
hook into its receiver. Repeat on the other
side.
Step Six
7. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing
the hook, locking the latch into place.
Step Seven
Installing The Soft Top Windows
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top
of the window into the retainer and slide
forward while keeping the window level.
Repeat on the other side.
Step One
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar
into the top cover, and insert the bottom tab
into the clip.
Step Two
Step Two
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install
steps could result in damage to the Soft Top
or vehicle.
2
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Engage the retainers on the front of the
windows, ensuring they are fully engaged,
followed by the retainers along the bottom
of the windows.
Step Three
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
before the vehicle resumes motion.
4. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the
upper front corner of each quarter window
by pressing firmly.
Step Four
Install The Rear Window
1. Guide the rear window into the retainer
from left to right while keeping the window
level.
Step One
2. Insert the swing gate bar into the retainers
at the bottom of the window from left to the
right.
Step Two
3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and
right side retainers.
Step Three
1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window
2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
4. Line up the rear window to the right side
quarter window first, and engage the plastic
retainers.
5. Repeat with the left side quarter window.
Step Five
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the
lower right and left corners.
Step Six
NOTE:
For information on removing your soft top, refer
to the next section.
REMOVING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
1. Fully lower the soft top
Ú
page 78.
2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on
both the left and right sides are in the “lock”
position, and an audible “click” is heard
when pushing down on the #1 bow from
each of the lift assist mechanisms before
removing.
Step Two
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
2
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver
and ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head
screws on each lift assist mechanism, then
lift the mechanism up and away from the
vehicle.
Step Three
4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail
rearward to release the side link from the
track.
Step Four
Step Four
5. Repeat on the opposite side.
6. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and
away from the vehicle, careful to avoid the
vehicle’s sport bar, trim, and tire carrier.
Store the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry
location.
Step Six
7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver
and ratchet, unscrew the Torx screw on both
rear corners of the vehicle, removing the
retainers.
Step Seven
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP
1. If currently installed, remove the hard top
Ú
page 91.
2. Install the door rails, starting with the front,
followed by the rear on each side. For
instructions and appropriate torque specifi-
cations for the door rail Torx screws
Ú page 99.
3. Install the rear retainers on each side of the
rear of the vehicle using the provided
#50 Torx head driver and ratchet. Refer to
the table below for recommended torque
specifications.
Step Three
4. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in
the “lock” position, lift the soft top into the
rear of the vehicle with the side links
pointing toward the front. Lower the lift
assist mechanisms onto its retainers on
both sides (on the inside of the sport bar).
Step Four
Step Four
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten Torx screws. Damage to
the retainers will occur.
Torque Speci-
fication For
Torx Screw
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lbs 150.5 in-lbs 106.2 in-lbs
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
2
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver
and ratchet, tighten the Torx screws by
turning them clockwise. Secure them until
they are snug (refer to the table below for
recommended torque specifications), being
careful not to cross-thread the screws or
overtighten. Repeat on the opposite side.
Step Five
6. While pulling the release lever on the top of
the rail rearward, place the side link into the
guide track on the top of the rail then
release the lever.
Step Six
7. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover.
This cover should be discarded. It was
intended as a protective cover for shipping
only.
8. Raise the soft top Ú page 80.
NOTE:
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner
is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift
the top.
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
Torque Speci-
fication For
Torx Screws
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lbs 150.5 in-lbs 106.2 in-lbs
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
the screws if they are overtightened.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
(Continued)
(Continued)
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S) REMOVAL
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
CAUTION!
The hard top is not designed to carry any
additional loads, such as after-market roof
racks, spare tires, building materials,
hunting or camping supplies, etc. For
optional Mopar accessory roof racks
Ú page 105.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the front
header, sport bar, and body side or fully
removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to panel removal. Removing the
top, opening a door or lowering a window
while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
lation can cause water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Careless handling and storage of the
removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Two Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
2
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All hard top removal and installation instruc-
tions are applicable to both two and four door
model vehicles.
Images shown are of four door models, and
appearance of two door model components
may differ.
The left side panel must be removed before
removing the right side panel.
To remove the hard top front panel(s), proceed
as follows:
1. Fold down the sun visor against the
windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left
side panel (one at the front, the rear, and
outside), unlocking them from the roof.
Step Two
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch
located at the top of the windshield.
Step Three
4. Remove the left side panel.
5. Repeat the steps above to remove the right
side panel.
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag — If
Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you
to store your hard top panels. The storage bag
contains two compartments.
Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down
so the loops and hooks are facing upward.
Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to
inserting the panel into the panels bag.
There is a pouch located on the front of the
bag to store the provided hard top edge
protectors that are used when the hard top is
not installed on the vehicle.
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the
bag with the latches facing upward.
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the
divider is laying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into
the bag with the latches facing downward.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to
inserting the panel into the bag.
1 — Header Panel Latched
2 — Unlatched Position
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top
bag closed.
Step Four
5. Lift the Freedom Top bag into the vehicle
with the hooks and straps facing the back of
the rear seat. Attach the clip at the bottom
of the bag to the child restraint anchorage,
located at the base of the rear seat.
6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head
restraints and loop the strap through the
buckle. Pull on the strap to tighten the
Freedom Top bag securely against the rear
seat.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S)
I
NSTALLATION
1. Set the right side panel on the windshield
frame with the locating pin in the front
receiver mounting hole followed by the left
side panel, making sure there is no
overhang. Also, make sure that the panels
are sitting flush with the body.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps
for removal in reverse order.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top
panels should be clear of any dust and debris
prior to reinstallation.
REMOVING THE HARD TOP
1. Remove both front panels
Ú
page 87.
2. Open both front doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver
and ratchet, remove the two Torx head
screws that secure the hard top at the
B-pillar (near the top of the front doors).
Step Three
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that
secure the hard top to the vehicle (along the
interior bodyside — three screws on each
side) using the #50 Torx head driver.
Step Four
2
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure
clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the
rear window glass.
Step Five
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose
on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle.
Step Six
7. Release the locking tab by pushing it
downward.
Step Seven
8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab
inward while pulling downward to
disconnect.
Step Eight
Step Eight
9. To remove the washer hose, push the
release button on hose connector, and pull
downward.
Step Nine
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
10. Secure the wire harness to the body side by
plugging it into the receptacle and
reengaging the locking tab.
Step Ten
11. Secure the washer hose by snapping it into
the top of the body side receptacle.
Step Eleven
Step Eleven
12. Lower the rear window, and close the swing
gate.
13. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.
Place the hard top on a soft surface to
prevent damage.
INSTALLING THE HARD TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top
usage, they must be removed prior to
installation of the hard top. For removal
procedures Ú page 97.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the
vehicle while making sure that the top is sitting
flush with the body at the sides and check to
ensure that there is a uniform gap between the
lift glass and hard top. Then follow the removal
steps in reverse order.
NOTE:
Inspect the hard top seals for damage and
replace if necessary.
The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to
the body should be torqued as follows using
the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet:
Hard top to B-pillar: 119 in-lb +/- 23 in-lb
(13.5 N·m +/- 2.7 N·m)
Hard top to J-rail: 154 in-lb +/- 30 in-lb
(17.5 N·m +/- 3.5 N·m)
CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four
adults, one located on each corner. Failure to
follow this caution could damage the Free-
dom Top.
2
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SLIDING TOP — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding
Top, the control switch can be found on the
front trim panel, to the right of the driver’s side
sun visor.
Power Sliding Top Control Switch
NOTE:
The Power Top is non-removable. If desired,
the rear quarter windows can be removed
and stored in the provided storage bag
Ú page 96.
The Power Top will not open in temperatures
below -4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened
at a higher temperature, it can be closed at
temperatures above -40°F (-40°C).
The Power Top will not operate at vehicle
speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h).
NOTE:
A slight pause in audio may be heard when
opening and closing the Power Sliding Top as a
result of the Uconnect system switching
between Power Top Closed and Power Top Open
audio modes.
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recom-
mended in vehicles equipped with a Power
Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the top as
well as the header seal.
1 — Open Switch
2 — Close Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power top while
operating the power top switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open power
top. You could also be seriously injured or
killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly
and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
power top. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the power top opening. Injury may result.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Opening And Closing The Power Top
Express Open/Close
Push the open switch and release it within
one-half second and the power top will open
automatically from any position. The power top
will open fully and stop automatically.
Push the close switch and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The power top
will close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the power
top switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the power top manually, push and hold
the open switch to the full open position, then
release.
To close the power top manually, push and hold
the close switch to the fully closed position,
then release.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the power top movement.
The top will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the power top during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
power top is detected, the power top will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs. Next, push the close switch and
release to Express Close.
NOTE:
The Power Sliding Top may reverse motion if
closing during a severe headwind. If this
occurs, push and hold the Power Sliding Top
switch again to close the top completely.
If three consecutive power top close
attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals,
Pinch Protect will disable and the power top
must be closed in Manual Mode.
Power Top Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the quarter window glass panel. For
important information on cleaning and caring
for your vehicle Ú page 422.
Ignition Off Operation
The power top switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed
to the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 211.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is
a relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate
the power top when the “Express Mode” stops
working. To reset the power top, follow these
steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and
start the vehicle.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to perform the
relearn procedure.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
power top is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fin-
gers and all objects from the top’s path
before closing.
2
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed
position.
3. Push and hold the Close switch for
10 seconds. This will put the power top
into calibration mode.
4. Continue holding down the close button
while the top goes fully open and then back
to fully close.
5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully
closed position, release the close button.
The power top is now reset and ready to
use.
NOTE:
If the close button is released anytime during
the relearning process, the relearn may not be
complete, and the procedure must be repeated.
Rear Quarter Window Removal
On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top,
the rear quarter windows can be removed. To
remove these windows, follow the procedure
below:
1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear
window.
2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter
windows.
3. Locate the rear quarter window latches
(two on each window) on the interior of the
windows.
4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwise to
release.
5. Rotate the right hand side latch counter-
clockwise to release.
Step Five
6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each
window upward and away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not pull down or apply any weight to the
windows after the latches are released.
Damage could result to the pins holding the
windows in place.
Step Six
Step Six
1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise
2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
7. Store the rear quarter windows in the
provided storage bag and keep in a safe
location, or securely fasten the bag to the
rear seat.
Quarter Window Storage Bag
To use the storage bags for the rear quarter
windows, proceed as follows:
1. With the bag completely open and the
fabric divider raised, place the first quarter
window with the latches facing outward
into the foam insert. Fold divider over the
window once placed inside.
Step One
2. Place the second window into the foam
insert with the latches facing outward. Fully
close the bag.
NOTE:
Once both windows are placed inside the bag,
the outside of the windows will be facing each
other with all latches facing the outside of the
bag.
Step Two
3. Store the bag in a safe location, or in the
cargo area of the vehicle by securing the
bag in the vehicle’s cargo area. This is done
by attaching the straps at the top of the bag
to the rear head restraints, as well as
attaching the clip at the bottom of the bag to
the forward most cargo hook on the load
floor.
Step Three
DOOR FRAME
1 — Bag Open With Divider Raised
2 — Lower Divider Over Window (Latches Facing
Outward)
1 — Second Window Placed Over Divider
2 — Fully Closed Bag
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the door frame(s) removed as you will
lose the protection that they can provide.
This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This
procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
2
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
NOTE:
In four door models, the rear door frames must
be removed first, followed by the front door
frames.
1. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver
and ratchet, loosen the Torx screws
located on the underside of each door
frame (two per door).
Door Frame Screw Locations
2. Once all the way loosened, remove the
screws by pulling downward.
NOTE:
Screws will not fall out once completely loose,
as they are held in place by an internal mecha-
nism.
Remove Screws From Below Frame
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the
vehicle.
Step Three
4. Store screws in a secure location.
5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame
(four door models).
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
Opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the
removable door frame(s) may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
The door frame(s) must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicle's
interior.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the door frame(s) removed as you will
lose the protection that they can provide.
This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION FOUR
D
OOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Install the front door rail first.
2. Carefully place the front door rail in the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield, and
line up the holes for the Torx head screws
(two for each door).
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from
underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx head
driver until they are snug, being careful not
to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the table below for the appropriate
torque specifications for the door rail
screws.
Step Three
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on
top of the body side, just behind the rear
door opening.
Step Four
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame
onto the rear of the front door rail, making
sure rubber seals lay flat. Ensure the seals
are installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
Position Of Frame Above Door
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This
procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
WARNING! (Continued)
Target Torque
Specification
For Torx Fas-
teners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lbs
(9 N·m)
87.6 in-lbs
(9.9 N·m)
71.7 in-lbs
(8.1 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
the screws if they are overtightened.
1 — Front Door Rail
2 — Rear Door Frame
2
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from
underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx head
driver until they are snug, being careful not
to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the table above for the appropriate
torque specifications for the door rail
screws.
Step Six
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION TWO DOOR
M
ODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Carefully place the front door rail in the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield,
and line up the holes for the Torx head
screws (two for each door).
2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from
underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx head
driver until they are snug, being careful not
to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the table below for the appropriate
torque specifications for the door rail
screws.
Step Two
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a
structural element that can provide some
protection in some accidents. The windshield
also provides some protection against weather,
road debris and intrusion of small branches and
other objects.
Target Torque
Specification
For Torx Fas-
teners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lbs
(9 N·m)
87.6 in-lbs
(9.9 N·m)
71.7 in-lbs
(8.1 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
the screws if they are overtightened.
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recom-
mended in vehicles equipped with a Power
Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the top as
well as the header seal.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
(Continued)
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down, as you lose the protection this
structural element can provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the
windshield can be folded down. However, the
protection afforded by the windshield is then
lost. If you fold down the windshield, drive slowly
and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph
(16 km/h), with low range operation preferred if
you are driving off-road with the windshield
folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that
required its removal is completed and before
you return to on-road driving. Both you and your
passengers should wear seat belts at all times,
on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the
windshield is raised or folded down.
LOWERING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Before completing the steps below:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft
Top, the top MUST be lowered, and the
door rails must be removed prior to
lowering the windshield.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard
Top, the Freedom Panels MUST be
removed prior to lowering the windshield.
Refer to the following instructions for
more information:
• Soft Top Lowering Ú page 78
• Door Frame Ú page 97
• Freedom Top Panels Ú page 87
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help pro-
tect against personal injury:
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind-
shield is securely fastened, either up or
down.
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be
worn at all times when the windshield is
down.
Be sure that you carefully follow the instruc-
tions for raising the windshield. Make sure
that the folding windshield, windshield
wipers, side bars, and all associated hard-
ware and fasteners are correctly and tightly
assembled before driving your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent your vehicle from providing you and
your passengers’ protection in some acci-
dents.
If you remove the doors, store them outside
the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a
loose door may cause personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage
to the vehicle’s header seal.
2
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Manually remove the protective caps over
the windshield wiper hex bolts.
Step Two
3. Using the provided 15mm socket, remove
the two hex bolts and remove the wiper
arms.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower
both sun visors.
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver,
remove the four Torx screws located along
the interior of the windshield.
Step Five
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts
the tie-down bumpers (if equipped).
Step Six
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch
strap through the tie-down on either side of
the hood and on the windshield frame.
Tighten the strap to secure the windshield
in place.
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Tie-Down
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the wind-
shield could result.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
ACC/FCW Sensor Protective Cover — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective
cover that is to be used whenever the
windshield is folded down in order to protect the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) sensor. To install the cover,
follow the instructions below:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it
hinges to the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that
it covers the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured
properly.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning
the windshield to the normal position. Store the
cover in the cargo area.
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt
can accumulate in the cover and block the
camera lens. Use a microfiber cloth to clean the
camera lens, module, and inside cover, being
careful not to damage or scratch the module.
RAISING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Release the strap that secured the
windshield in the lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver,
reinstall the four Torx screws located along
the interior of the windshield. Secure them
until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Interior Torx Screw Locations
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using
the provided 15 mm socket. First, align the
tips of the blade to the “T” mark in the glass.
Then, while holding the arm in that position,
reinstall the hex nut and tighten until snug.
Be careful not to over-tighten. Repeat for
the other arm.
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper
arm hex bolts and push gently until they
snap into place.
Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt
6. After completing the steps above:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft
Top, reinstall the Door Rails and raise the
top.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard
Top, reinstall the Freedom Panels.
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
2
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
Release both the hood latches.
Hood Latch Locations
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch,
located in the middle of the hood opening. Push
the safety latch to the left side of the vehicle, to
open the hood. You may have to push down
slightly on the hood before pushing the safety
latch. Unhook the support rod from the hood
and insert it into the slot on the front end above
the radiator.
CLOSING THE HOOD
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
To close the hood, remove the support rod from
the slot and replace it on the hood panel
retaining clip. Lower the hood slowly. Secure
both of the hood latches.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using
one of the following methods:
Mechanical key (with mechanical lock — if
equipped)
Remote Keyless Entry key fob (if equipped)
Power door unlock switch on the front doors
(if equipped)
Passive Entry swing gate handle (if equipped)
To open the swing gate, pull on the handle.
Swing Gate Handle
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driv-
ing your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that
both latches engage. Do not fully open and
rest the hood on the windshield.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
NOTE:
Close the rear flip-up window before attempting
to close the swing gate (hard top models only).
NOTE:
The swing gate hinges and check strap may
require cleaning if a squeak can be heard when
opening the swing gate. Progressive accumula-
tion on the check strap arm may cause failure of
the check strap, requiring replacement. For
further information on vehicle cleaning proce-
dures Ú page 424.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trail Rail Cargo Organizer — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trail Rail
system, a rail will be found built into the floor on
either side of the cargo area. Each rail contains
an adjustable anchor loop that can be used to
secure cargo. The position of the adjustable
anchor loop can be adjusted by sliding the loop
along the rail.
To adjust the anchor loop, push down on the
center button while sliding the loop along the
rail to the desired position. Release the button
and move the loop slightly to the next fixed
position in the notches of the rail.
Adjustable Anchor Loop
Lift the loop to use.
Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models
ONLY.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lbs
(45 kg), this includes the weight of the
crossbars, and it should be uniformly
distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever
cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by these
fumes. Keep the flip-up window closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing
the rear flip-up window, as damage to the
blade will result.
2
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the
vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driv-
ing your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or prop-
erty damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy
loads as evenly as possible and secure the
load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the wind-
shield, should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection
between the surface of the roof and the
load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift. It is recommended
to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to cross-
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
107
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster — Gasoline
3
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster — Gasoline
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Base Instrument Cluster — Diesel
3
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster — Diesel
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display Ú page 111.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachome-
ter pointer in the red area. Engine damage
will occur.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your vehi-
cle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the tempera-
ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains
on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
3
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow button allows
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
They also allow you to change the Main Screen
area and Menu Title area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows
you to cycle through the submenu screens of
the Main menu item.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. To reset displayed/selected
features push and hold the OK button for two
seconds.
The Main Menu items consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off Road — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
OIL CHANGE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display for five seconds after
a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK button. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer
to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start
the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle
Info" in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to toggle
between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to scroll through the information
submenus and push and release the OK button
to select or reset the resettable submenus.
Off Road
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Off Road menu icon is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
Tire Pressure Coolant Tempera-
ture
Transmission
Temperature —
Automatic Trans-
mission Only
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure Oil Life
Battery Voltage Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Level — If
Equipped
3
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
release the left or right arrow button to
scroll through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical
and numerical value of calculated
average front wheel angle from the
steering wheel orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays
“Lock” graphic only during 4WD High,
4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If
Equipped): displays front and rear or rear
only axle locker graphic, and sway bar
connection graphic with text message
(connected or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle
in the graphic with the angle number on
the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to
display the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in
place of the numbers, and the graphic will be
greyed out. A message indicating the necessary
speed for the feature to become available will
also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of
the ACC systems.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed
in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If
Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC system settings. The information
displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on
the steering wheel), and the following will
display in the instrument cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity Ú page 170.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and hold the OK button to reset average
fuel economy feature.
Toggle left or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the
Range value is less than 10 miles (16 kilome-
ters), the Range display will change to a “LOW”
message. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message
and a new Range value will display. Range
cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since
the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while
driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display, then push and
release the left or right arrow button to
select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
The screen will display the Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This menu will display the audio source
information, including the Song name, Artist
name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up
will remain until the phone is answered or
ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the
previous media source information displayed
on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the right
arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu
icon will be a closed envelope, and “No Stored
Messages” will display.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location that information is displayed.
3
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Current MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Current MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio
Speedometer
Menu Title
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Current MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Gear Display — If Equipped
Full
Single
Current Gear — If Equipped
On
Off
Odometer — If Equipped
Show
Hide
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off Road – If Equipped (show/hide)
Driver Assist – If Equipped (show/hide)
Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Trip Info (Show/Hide)
Stop/Start
Audio (show/hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Cancel
Restore
The menu with (show/hide) means user can
press OK button to choose show or hide this
menu on the instrument cluster display.
Settings
The following menu/submenu items are
available in the cluster display:
Speed Warning:
Sets the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is
notified of through a visual and acoustic
signaling (display of a message and a symbol on
the display).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
When the speed warning is set, the icon should
remain visualized for the same duration time of
the pop up. If the driver exceeded the set speed,
the icon should remain for however long the
vehicle is over the set speed.
Driver may also turn the Speed Warning “OFF”
should you choose not to use this feature.
Passenger Air Bag — If Equipped:
Front passenger air bag may be enabled or
disabled.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to
or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 123.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of the charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and inte-
rior lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volt,
150W, USB ports) during certain driving condi-
tions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles
and similar devices.
3
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volt, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
DIESEL DISPLAYS
When the appropriate conditions exist, the
following messages display in the instrument
cluster display:
Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at
Consistent Speeds to Clear
Exhaust Filter Full – Power Reduced See
Dealer
Exhaust System Service Required – See
Dealer
Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service
Required See Dealer
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process
Continue Driving
Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
M
ESSAGES
This engine meets all required diesel engine
emissions standards. To achieve these
emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped
with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
system. These systems are seamlessly
integrated into your vehicle and managed by
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
manages engine combustion to allow the
exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input
or interaction on your part.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
CAUTION!
The engine may be switched off even if the
warning light is on: repeated interruptions of
the regeneration process could cause an
early deterioration of engine oil. For this rea-
son it is always advisable to wait for the sym-
bol to go off before turning off the engine,
following the instructions above. Do not com-
plete the DPF regeneration process when the
vehicle is stopped.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your
vehicle or engine. Refer to the following
messages that may be displayed on your
instrument cluster display:
Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at
Consistent Speeds to Clear — This message
will be displayed if the exhaust particulate
filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage
capacity. Under conditions of exclusive short
duration and low speed driving cycles, your
diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment
system may never reach the conditions
required to cleanse the filter to remove the
trapped PM. If this occurs, the “Exhaust Filter
XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to
Remedy” message will be displayed. If this
message is displayed, you will hear one
chime to assist in alerting you of this condi-
tion. By simply driving your vehicle at highway
speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can remedy
the condition in the particulate filter system
and allow your diesel engine and exhaust
after-treatment system to cleanse the filter to
remove the trapped PM and restore the
system to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process
Continue Driving — This message indicates
that the DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain your
current driving condition until regeneration is
completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed
— This message indicates that the DPF
self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust System Service Required — See
Dealer — This messages indicates regenera-
tion has been disabled due to a system
malfunction. At this point the engine Power-
train Control Module (PCM) will register a
fault code, the instrument panel will display a
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See
Dealer — This message indicates the PCM
has derated the engine to limit the likelihood
of permanent damage to the after-treatment
system. If this condition is not corrected and
a dealer service is not performed, extensive
exhaust after-treatment damage can occur.
To correct this condition it will be necessary
to have your vehicle serviced by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator,
changing your oil and resetting the oil change
indicator by 0 miles (0 kilometers) remaining
will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from
performing its cleaning routine. This will shortly
result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and
reduced engine power. Only an authorized
dealer will be able to correct this condition.
FUEL SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following chart contains a list of different
messages that may appear in the instrument
cluster, depending on different system or fuel
conditions. Use the descriptions to interpret
what the message means and determine the
best action to take.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with contin-
ued operation.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with contin-
ued operation.
3
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Warning Messages:
Low Diesel Emissions Additive
AdBlue® (UREA) Level Warning
The first low level warning will be given at around a 1,490 miles (2,400 km) range, and is determined
according to the current consumption rate. The “UREA Low Level” warning light and message will display on
the instrument panel. The UREA low level warning light will remain lit until the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is
topped up with at least 1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of UREA.
If the level is not resolved, an additional warning appears whenever a certain threshold is reached until it
will no longer be possible to start the engine.
When 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a message will appear
on the instrument panel, accompanied by a buzzer sound. When the range is at 0, the display will show a
dedicated message (if equipped). In this case, the engine will not restart.
It will be possible to restart the engine again as soon as AdBlue® (UREA) is added; the minimum amount
required is 1.32 gallons (5 Liters). Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible with at least 1.32 gal-
lons (5 Liters) of UREA. If filling is completed with autonomy tank AdBlue® (UREA) to zero, it could be possi-
ble to wait two minutes before starting the vehicle.
NOTE:
When the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, and the vehicle is stopped, it is no longer possible to restart the
vehicle until a minimum of 1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of AdBlue® (UREA) is added to the AdBlue® (UREA) tank.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Fault Warning Messages:
Engine Will Not Restart Service
AdBlue® System See Dealer
This message will display if the AdBlue® (UREA) system issue detected is not serviced during the allowed
period. Your engine will not restart unless your vehicle is serviced by an authorized dealer. If the level is not
resolved, an additional warning appears whenever a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer be
possible to start the engine. When 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the AdBlue® tank is empty, a
message will appear on the instrument panel, accompanied by a buzzer sound.
Engine Will Not Start Service AdBlue®
System See Dealer
NOTE:
The display may take up to five seconds to update after adding 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) or more of AdBlue®
(UREA) to the AdBlue® (UREA) tank. If you have a fault related to the AdBlue® (UREA) system, the display
may not update to the new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures lower than 51.8°F (11°C). If the car stands for a long time at this
temperature, refilling could be difficult. For this reason, it is advised to park the vehicle in a garage and/
or heated environment, and wait for the AdBlue® (UREA) to return to liquid state before topping up.
Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF) System Messages — If Equipped:
Exhaust System Service Required
The engine control unit has detected an issue with the gasoline particulate filter system. See an authorized
dealer.
Exhaust System Regeneration in Pro-
cess Continue Driving
The regeneration procedure is controlled automatically by the engine control unit according to the filter
conditions and car use conditions. The following may occur during regeneration: increased levels of Noise
Vibration and Harshness (NVH) and reduced engine performance. The driver should continue driving nor-
mally. This message will continue to appear until regeneration is complete.
Exhaust System Regeneration Com-
plete
The exhaust gas filter regeneration has been completed. This message will briefly appear.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
3
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is not on during startup, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehi-
cle. You could have a collision. Have the vehi-
cle checked immediately.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 305.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 163.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK (P)
position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth-
ers. Service should be obtained as soon as
possible.
3
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service Ú page 355.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate, and
a chime will sound, to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light and
chime turn on while driving, safely
stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. After the vehicle is safely stopped,
restart the engine and monitor the Oil Pressure
Warning Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning Light
is still illuminated, turn the engine OFF and
contact an authorized dealer for further
assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until the
cause is corrected. If the lamp is no longer
illuminated, the engine can be operated but it is
recommended to take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the swing gate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
Vehicle Security system is arming,
and then will flash slowly until the
vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission dam-
age or transmission failure.
3
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly
close the filler cap to disengage the
light. If the light does not turn off,
please see an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this
light will turn on and a chime will
sound. The light will remain on until
fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 368.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The MIL is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants,
wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect
fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate along
with a dedicated message on the
display (if equipped) if an unknown
fluid not conforming with acceptable
characteristics is inserted, or if an average
consumption of AdBlue® (UREA) over 50% is
detected. Contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
If the problem is not solved, a specific message
will appear on the Instrument Cluster Display
whenever a certain threshold is reached until it
will no longer be possible to start the engine.
When about 125 miles (200 km) are remaining
before the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a
continuous dedicated message will appear on
the instrument panel, accompanied by a chime.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 297.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control System is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is
a fault in the sway bar disconnect
system Ú page 154.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steer-
ing. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immedi-
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
3
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
able system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive
mode, and the front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels Ú page 154.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive part
time mode, and the front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front
and/or rear axle locker fault has been
detected.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off Ú page 297.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front,
rear, or both axles have been locked.
The telltale will display the lock icon
on the front and rear axles to indicate
the current lock status.
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the neutral mode.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated Ú page 154.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is
not operating and needs service
Ú page 170.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front sway bar is
disconnected.
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the ON/RUN
position. Its duration may be longer
based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle
will not initiate start until telltale is no longer
displayed Ú page 134.
NOTE:
The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if
the intake manifold temperature is warm
enough.
3
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue®
(UREA) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions
Additive AdBlue® (UREA) indicator
light illuminates when the AdBlue®
(UREA) level is low.
Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as
possible with at least 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of
AdBlue® (UREA).
If filling the tank is done with a remaining range
of AdBlue® (UREA) in the tank equal to zero, you
may need to wait two minutes before starting
the vehicle.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
illuminate when there is water
detected in the fuel filter. If this light
remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to
prevent engine damage, and please see an
authorized dealer.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is set and
there is no vehicle in front detected
Ú page 170.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 170.
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto
mode. The system will provide power
to all four wheels and shift the power
between the front and rear axles as needed.
This will provide maximum traction in dry and
slippery conditions.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Cruise Control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 168.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on
Ú page 49.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
CAUTION!
The presence of water in the fuel system cir-
cuit may cause severe damage to the injec-
tion system and irregular engine operation. If
the indicator light is illuminated, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to
bleed the system. If the above indications
come on immediately after refuelling, water
has probably been poured into the tank:
switch the engine off immediately and con-
tact an authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned
on, but not set.
2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
With a Premium Instrument Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the two wheel drive high
mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be
on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case
is in the “4WD Low” position and the vehicle
speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when
“Selec-Speed Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”, ensure the
vehicle is in 4WD Low and push the button on
the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not
set.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Cruise Control is set.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
3
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not
set.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 210.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your
vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a
depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the
OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
134
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector
in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before
starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will
not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4WD Low mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the
engine will start regardless of whether or not
the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This
feature enhances off-road performance by
allowing the vehicle to start when in 4WD Low
without having to press the clutch pedal. The
“4WD Low Indicator Light” will illuminate when
the transfer case has been shifted into this
mode.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
E
QUIPPED
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the
PARK position (vehicle can also be started in
NEUTRAL). Apply the brake before shifting to
any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
button again.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
(Continued)
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with
vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the
transmission will automatically select PARK
and the engine will turn off while the ignition
will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF
mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pushing the START/STOP button once will
turn the engine off. The ignition will remain
in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be
held for two seconds (or three short pushes in
a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode)
if the engine is turned off when the
transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the
ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in
the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and
the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode (instrument cluster will display “ON/
RUN”).
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode (instrument cluster will display
“OFF”).
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
4
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed
transmission
Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is
removed and the driver is not on the seat
(seat pad sensor detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
Ignition switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed
transmission
Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is
removed and the driver is not on the seat
(seat pad sensor detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is removed
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the gear selector must be returned to “P”
to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD Low.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
(Continued)
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
instrument cluster display and on the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER (BELOW
–22°F O
R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in
the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal
and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically and
will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your
seat belts.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to
30-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
between such intervals will protect the starter
from overheating.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 352.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not con-
tinuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the
parking brake.
Always make sure the wireless ignition
node is in the OFF mode, key fob is
removed from the vehicle and vehicle is
locked.
4
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Engine start up in very low ambient temperature
could result in evident white smoke. This condi-
tion will disappear as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission gear
selector in the PARK (P) position. Apply the
brake before shifting to any driving range.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The engine block heater is a resistance heater
installed in the water jacket of the engine. It
requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Its
use is recommended for environments that
routinely fall below -10°F (-23°C). It should be
used when the vehicle has not been running
overnight or longer periods and should be
plugged in two hours prior to start. Its use is
required for cold starts with temperatures
under -20°F (-28°C).
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater cords are available from an authorized
Mopar dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter
housing aids in preventing fuel gelling. It is
controlled by a built-in thermostat.
A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves
engine starting and reduces the amount of
white smoke generated by a warming engine.
NORMAL STARTING
Observe the instrument cluster lights when
starting the engine.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
The engine is allowed to crank as long as
30 seconds. If the engine fails to start
during this period, please wait at least two
minutes for the starter to cool before
repeating start procedure.
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light”
remains on, DO NOT START engine before
you drain the water from the fuel filters to
avoid engine damage Ú page 375.
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
(Continued)
NOTE:
A delay of the start of up to five seconds is
possible under very cold conditions. The "Wait
to Start" telltale will be illuminated during the
pre-heat process. When the engine “Wait To
Start” telltale goes off the engine will automati-
cally crank.
3. The system will automatically engage the
starter to crank the engine. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light
has turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with a glow plug
preheating system. If the instructions in this
manual are followed, the engine should start in
all conditions and no type of starting fluid
should be used.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the diesel engine is
operating:
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
Voltmeter operation.
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This is caused by
the glow plug heating system. The number of
cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
controlled by the engine control module. Glow
plug heater operation can run for several
minutes. Once the heater operation is
complete, the voltmeter needle will stabilize.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage Ú page 375.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the
“OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may require special considerations. The following charts suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels (ULSD)” ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions 0°F (-18°C) exist.
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
NOTE:
Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number
1 ULSD Fuel results in a noticeable decrease
in fuel economy.
Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number
2 ULSD Fuel and Number 1 ULSD Fuel which
reduces the temperature at which wax crys-
tals form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on
the pump at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of “Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel”. Use of incorrect fuel
could result in engine and exhaust system
damage Ú page 434.
If climatized or Number 1 ULSD Fuel is not
available, and you are operating below 20°F
(-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equiva-
lent) is recommended to avoid gelling (see
Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
See Engine Fluids and Lubricants for the correct
engine oil viscosity Ú page 438.
Winter Front Cover
A Winter front or cold weather cover can be
used in ambient temperatures below 32°F
(0°C), especially during extended idle
conditions. This cover is equipped with four
flaps for managing total grille opening in varying
ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold
weather cover is to be used, the flaps should be
in the full open position to allow air flow to the
cooling module and automatic transmission oil
cooler. When ambient temperatures drop below
0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A
suitable cold weather cover is available from a
Mopar dealer.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the
engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the
oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate
the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes
before full loads are applied.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling
may be harmful to your engine because
combustion chamber temperatures can drop so
low that the fuel may not burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
varnish to form on piston rings, cylinder head
valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned
fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil
and causing rapid wear to the engine.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
After full load operation, idle the engine for a
few minutes before shutting it down. This idle
period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant
to carry excess heat away from the
turbocharger.
NOTE:
Refer to the following chart for proper engine
shutdown.
4
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the engine fan will run
after the engine is turned off. These conditions
are under high load and high temperature
conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS — AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
To reduce the potential for engine and
transmission overheating in high ambient
temperature conditions, take the following
actions:
City Driving — When stopped, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL (N) and increase
engine idle speed.
Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission
gear.
Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
NOTE:
If the coolant temperature is too high, the A/C
will automatically turn off.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
If the low oil pressure warning light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut down
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound when the light turns on.
NOTE:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not show how much
oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal read-
ings, shut the engine off immediately. Failure
to do so could result in immediate and severe
engine damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the
parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in
performance, sounds, and visual evidence that
the engine requires service. Some important
clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
Sudden loss of power
Unusual engine noises
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks
Sudden change, outside the normal oper-
ating range, in the engine operating tempera-
ture
Excessive smoke
Oil pressure drop
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
Diesel Engine Block Heater Cord Location
The engine block heater cord is found under the
hood bundled up next to the Power Distribution
Center (PDC).
For diesel engines, its use is recommended for
environments that routinely fall below -10°F
(-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has
not been running for long periods of time and
should be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its
use is required for cold starts with temperatures
under -20°F (-28°C).
The engine block heater cord is found under the
hood bundled in front of the battery tray.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
4
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
For the recommended viscosity and quality
grades see Ú page 438.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
The diesel engine does not require a break-in
period due to its construction. Normal operation
is allowed, providing the following
recommendations are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under
load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for
prolonged periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to
prevent engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and tempera-
ture indicators.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds
when carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing
or no load operation will extend the time before
the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel
economy and power may be seen at this time.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For recommended
viscosity and quality grades see Ú page 438.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or
manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST
gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up as firmly as possible. To release the
parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push
the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
automatic transmission is placed in gear, the
“Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle
speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert
the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min-
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
(Continued)
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector
out of PARK.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position on an auto-
matic transmission as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
an automatic transmission in PARK, a
manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST
gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll and cause damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake sys-
tem serviced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the park-
ing brake fully applied. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle
on a hill with the clutch pedal partially
engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
gear selector as the force exerted, even if
slight, could lead over time to premature
wear of the gearbox internal components.
4
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmis-
sion fluid warms up. This is normal.
Transmission Gear Selector
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal
and place the gear selector into the desired
gear position (the diagram for the engagement
of the gears is displayed on the handle of the
selector).
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below
the knob and move the gear selector all the way
left and then forward.
Shift Pattern
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting
from a standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmis-
sion is normal. This noise can be most notice-
able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but
it may also be heard when driving. The noise
may also be more noticeable when the trans-
mission is warm. This noise is normal and is not
an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently
for both fuel economy and performance, it
should be upshifted as listed in recommended
shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds
listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or
pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
(Continued)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2WD High and 4WD High only. Vehicle speeds in
4WD Low would be significantly less.
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at
the right time provides better acceleration when
you desire to resume speed. Downshift
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid
overspeeding the engine and clutch.
NOTE:
The manual transmission shift system is
equipped with gear blockers, which will prevent
downshifts into FIRST or SECOND gear above
certain vehicle speeds.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip, and the vehicle could
skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower
gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage
the engine and clutch systems. Any attempt
to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal
pressed may result damage to the clutch
system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.
When descending a hill, be very careful to
downshift one gear at a time to prevent
overspeeding the engine which can cause
engine damage, and/or clutch damage,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
transfer case is in low range the vehicle
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage
are significantly lower.
Failure to follow the maximum recom-
mended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch
pedal pressed could result in clutch
damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2WD High and 4WD High only, vehicle speeds in
4WD Low would be significantly less.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the
clutch pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is
properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
EIGHT–SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is
displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
push the lock button on the gear selector and
move the selector rearward or forward. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must
be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 153.
Transmission Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward), it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument
cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into
the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the gear selector all the way forward until it
stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position should be used for all normal operating
conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
to select a lower gear Ú page 153. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 199.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 357.
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of
transmission shifting also known as AutoStick
mode. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster Ú page 153.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster
message indicates the transmission may not
re-engage after engine shutdown, perform
this procedure only in a desired location
(preferably, at an authorized dealer).
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized
dealer at your earliest possible convenience.
An authorized dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to assess the condition of your trans-
mission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, autho-
rized dealer service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside
the DRIVE position). The current transmission
gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear
4
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually
shift the transmission.
AutoStick mode has the following operational
benefits:
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4WD Low
range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow
starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
SECOND or THIRD gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the gear selector in the (-) position
will downshift the transmission to the lowest
gear possible at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick
is not active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in
or out of the AutoStick position at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
FOUR-POSITION TRANSFER CASE — IF
E
QUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage
or loss of power and vehicle control. You
could have a collision. Do not drive the vehi-
cle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
2H (2WD High) — Two-Wheel Drive High
Range
4H (4WD High) —Four-Wheel Drive High
Range
N (Neutral)
4L (4WD Low) — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2WD High
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4WD High
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle Ú page 199.
4WD Low
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the
2WD High position for normal street and
highway conditions, such as hard-surfaced
roads.
In the event that additional traction is required,
the transfer case 4WD High and 4WD Low
positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4WD
High and 4WD Low positions are intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only and not
intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4WD
High and 4WD Low positions on hard-surfaced
roads will cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components. Refer to
“Shifting Procedures” in this section for further
information on shifting into 4WD High or 4WD
Low.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light
will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4WD High position.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
engine speed will be approximately three times
(four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2WD
High or 4WD High positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case (N) Neutral position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
4
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause damage
to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2WD High To 4WD High Or 4WD High To 2WD
High
Shifting between 2WD High and 4WD High can
be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion.
The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to
45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster
if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after completing the shift. Do not
accelerate while shifting the transfer case.
Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The front
and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for
the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause
damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transfer
case fluid warms up. This is normal.
4WD High To 4WD Low Or 4WD Low To 4WD
High
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired
position. Do not pause with the transfer case in
N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place
the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
release the clutch pedal on a manual
transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4WD Low is possible with
the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
culty may occur due to the mating teeth not being
properly aligned. Several attempts may be
required for clutch teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred method is with
the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4WD
Low with the vehicle moving faster than 1 to
3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage
or loss of power and vehicle control. You
could have a collision. Do not drive the vehi-
cle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
FIVE-POSITION TRANSFER CASE — IF
E
QUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides five mode positions:
2H (2WD High) — Two-Wheel Drive High
Range
4H AUTO (4WD High AUTO) — Four-Wheel
Drive Auto High Range
4H PT (4WD High PT) — Four-Wheel Drive Part
Time High Range
N (Neutral)
4L (4WD Low) — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2WD High
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4WD High AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range
sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel
drive system will be automatically engaged
when the vehicle senses a loss of traction.
Additional traction for varying road conditions.
4WD High PT
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This
range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 199.
4WD Low
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case (N) Neutral position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
4
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
This transfer case is designed to be driven in
the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or
four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for
normal street and highway conditions on dry
hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD
will have greater fuel economy benefits as the
front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO
mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle
is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to
the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses
a loss of traction. Because the front axle is
engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel
economy than the 2WD mode.
In the event that additional traction is required,
the transfer case 4WD High and 4WD Low
positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4WD
High and 4WD Low positions are intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only and not
intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4WD
High and 4WD Low positions on hard-surfaced
roads will cause increased tire wear and damage
to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting
Procedures” in this section for further information
on shifting into 4WD High or 4WD Low.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light
will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4WD High position.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
engine speed will be approximately three times
(four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2WD
High or 4WD High positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause damage
to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2WD High To 4WD High AUTO Or 4WD High
AUTO To 2WD High
Shifting between 2WD High and 4WD High
AUTO can be made with the vehicle stopped or
in motion. The preferred shifting speed would
be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the
accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do
not accelerate while shifting the transfer case.
Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
2WD High/4WD High AUTO To 4WD High PT Or
4WD High PT To 2WD High/4WD High AUTO
Shifting between 2WD High/4WD High AUTO to
4WD High PT can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting
speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after completing
the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
transfer case. Apply a constant force when
shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The front
and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for
the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause
damage to the transfer case.
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transfer
case fluid warms up. This is normal.
4WD High PT/4WD High AUTO To 4WD Low Or
4WD Low To 4WD High PT/4WD High AUTO
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired
position. Do not pause with the transfer case in
N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place
the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
release the clutch pedal on a manual
transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4WD Low is possible with
the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
culty may occur due to the mating teeth not being
properly aligned. Several attempts may be
required for clutch teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred method is with
the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4WD
Low with the vehicle moving faster than 1 to
3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant
driving force to both rear wheels and reduces
wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one
driving wheel. If traction differs between the two
rear wheels, the differential automatically
proportions the usable torque by providing
more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery
driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the
accelerator will supply maximum traction.
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) FRONT AND
R
EAR — IF EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the
instrument panel (to the right of the steering
column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage
or loss of power and vehicle control. You
could have a collision. Do not drive the vehi-
cle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip dif-
ferential, never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground. The vehicle may drive
through the rear wheel remaining on the
ground and cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
4
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4WD Low.
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h)
or less.
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the
same speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK
switch down to lock the rear axle only (the
“REAR ONLY” will illuminate), push the switch
up to lock the front axle and rear axle (the
“FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear
axle is locked, pushing the bottom of switch
again will lock or unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are
fully locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF
button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken
out of 4WD Low, or the ignition switch is turned
to the OFF position.
The axle lock disengages at speeds above
30 mph (48 km/h), and will automatically
re-lock once vehicle speed is less than 10 mph
(16 km/h).
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY — IF
E
QUIPPED
The rear axle may be locked in 4WD High if the
proper conditions are met.
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the
instrument panel (to the right of the steering
column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4WD High.
The vehicle must be in Off Road+ active
Ú page 162.
Vehicle must be in ESC “Full Off” mode
Ú page 287.
Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel
slip or tight cornering condition.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK
switch down to lock the rear axle only (“REAR
ONLY” will illuminate).
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK
OFF button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken
out of 4WD High, Off Road+ is turned off by the
driver, ESC “Full Off” is exited, or the ignition
switch is turned to the OFF position.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle
is fully locked or unlocked.
The rear axle lock system may temporarily
disengage the rear locker under some
conditions.
If this occurs, the rear axle will automatically
re-lock as soon as the system allows.
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on
any public roadways.
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar.
This system allows greater front suspension
travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR
switch located on the instrument panel (to the
right of the steering column).
SWAY BAR Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the
system. Push the switch again to deactivate the
system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” (located
in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when
the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash during activation
transition, or when activation conditions are not
met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
either 4WD High or 4WD Low and push the
SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road position
Ú page 154. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will
flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differ-
ences. This condition is due to driving surface
differences or vehicle loading. In order for the
stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,
the right and left halves of the bar must be
aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked
from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR
switch again.
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected
before driving on hard surfaced roads or at
speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h); a discon-
nected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to
the loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury. Under certain circum-
stances, the front stabilizer/sway bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists with
vehicle control. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabi-
lizer/sway bar at speeds over 18 mph
(29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or
solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle
speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h),
the system will once again attempt to return
to off-road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light”
will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle
stability may be reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a
disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contrib-
ute to the loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
4
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF ROAD+ — IF EQUIPPED
Off Road+ Switch
When activated, Off Road+ is designed to
improve the user experience when using
specific Off Road driving modes. To activate Off
Road+, push the Off Road+ switch in the switch
bank. The vehicle’s performance will improve
depending on which Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
mode is activated.
NOTE:
Off Road+ will not function in 2WD High mode.
If the button is pushed while in 2WD High mode,
the cluster display will show the message “Off
Road+ Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.
When Off Road+ is active, the following features
will activate:
The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster display
A mode specific message will display the
instrument cluster display
Off Road pages will launch on the radio
head-unit if selected in radio settings
The Off Road Camera will launch if selected
in radio settings
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to
behave in different ways depending on the 4WD
mode in use. The following enhancements will
occur when using Off Road+.
4L (4WD Low)
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl
and controllability focus, change in shifting
schedule when rock crawling, pedal calibra-
tion shifted to de-gain and low range, oper-
ates at lower vehicle speeds
Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differ-
ential tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
Off Road+: Recall the last status between
ignition cycles
4H (4WD High)
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved
sand performance/ wheel slip focus, change
in shift schedule for sport mode, pedal cali-
bration set to aggressive, operates at
elevated vehicle speeds
Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip
tuning brake lock differential with no engine
management
Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with
unlimited speed
Off Road+: Will default to OFF between igni-
tion cycles
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) will not function while using Off Road+.
A dedicated cluster message will display
indicating this if either feature is activated while
in Off Road+.
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off
Road+, the following will occur on the vehicle:
Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control
will turn off, but Stability Control will remain
active.
Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds:
Traction Control and Stability Control will turn
off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electro-hydraulic power steering system that
will give you good vehicle response and
increased ease of maneuverability in tight
spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while
driving. If the electro-hydraulic power steering
system experiences a fault that prevents it from
providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering
capability.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a flashing icon are displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance Ú page 111.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an
icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused
an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over
temperature condition no longer exists. Once
driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off Ú page 111.
NOTE:
Even if power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be
a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at very low vehicle speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is
developed to reduce fuel consumption. The
system will stop the engine automatically during
a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the
accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the
engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque
contain a heavy duty motor generator and an
additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
from vehicle deceleration for use on engine
startup after a stop as well as providing launch
torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start system be
disabled during off-road use.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the
electrically driven pump to reduce or stop
power steering assistance in order to prevent
damage to the system. Normal operation will
resume once the system is allowed to cool.
4
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
battery used to power the Stop/Start system
and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The
secondary battery is located behind the wheel
well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
driver ignition start. At that time, the system will
go into STOP/START READY and if all other
conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START
AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 111.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The shifter must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. Situations when the engine will
not stop include (but not limited to):
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
Gear selector in MANUAL (M) mode.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
Engine temperature too high.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see an authorized
dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
Hood is open.
Transfer case is in 4WD Low or N (Neutral).
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from
previous auto-stop.
Steering angle beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only).
ACC is on and speed is set.
Vehicle is at high altitude.
System fault present.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is pressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted higher.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time
exceeds 5 minutes.
Transfer case is in 4WD Low or N (Neutral).
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
(ESS Models Only).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “Stop/Start OFF” message will
appear in instrument cluster display within the
Stop/Start section, and the autostop function
will be disabled Ú page 111.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
an ON condition every time the ignition is turned
off and back on.
4
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 111.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key
start.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is
developed to reduce fuel consumption. The
system will stop the engine automatically during
a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Pressing the clutch pedal will
automatically restart the vehicle.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque
contain a heavy duty motor generator and an
additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
from vehicle deceleration for use on engine
startup after a stop as well as providing launch
torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start be disabled
during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
battery used to power the Stop/Start system
and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The
secondary battery is located behind the wheel
well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
AUTOSTOP MODE
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see an authorized
dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
driver ignition start. It will remain in STOP/
START NOT READY until you drive forward with a
vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At
that time, the system will go into STOP/START
READY and if all other conditions are met, can
go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE
mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP
ACTIVE Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster
Ú page 111.
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph
(3 km/h).
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL
position and the clutch pedal must be fully
released
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Situations when the engine
will not stop include (but not limited to):
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Outside temperature is less than 10°F
(–12°C) or greater than 109°F (43°C).
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
Battery discharged.
When driving in REVERSE.
Hood is open.
Transfer case is in 4WD Low or N (Neutral).
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door is
open.
Vehicle is at high altitude.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Forward Gear is engaged.
Steering angle beyond threshold. (ESS
Models Only).
System fault is present.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the
engine will start when the clutch pedal is
pressed (does not require complete/full pedal
press). The vehicle will go into STOP/START
SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
automatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP
ACTIVE mode
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted higher.
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time
exceeds 5 minutes.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
Transfer case is in 4WD Low or N (Neutral).
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
(ESS Models Only).
4
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear
in the instrument cluster Ú page 111.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
Stop/Start system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually turned
off, the engine can only be started and
stopped by cycling the ignition switch.
5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to an ON condition every time the ignition is
turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 111.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key
start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi-
tions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruised Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster
than you want. You could lose control and
have an accident. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
4
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmis-
sion only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
E
QUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. The
Cruise Control function performs differently if
your vehicle is not equipped with ACC
Ú page 168.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi-
tions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
(Continued)
(Continued)
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
distance not set) will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
mode selected Ú page 446.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,
traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle
speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is
always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
On vehicles with an automatic trans-
mission, will bring the vehicle to a
complete stop while following a vehicle
ahead and hold the vehicle for two
seconds in the stop position. If the
vehicle ahead does not start moving
within two seconds the ACC system will
display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes
must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are
released.
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off ramp; when driving on roads that
are winding, icy, snow-covered, slip-
pery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the manual transmission is in FIRST
gear
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h) (manual transmission)
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
ESC Full Off mode is active
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
On vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, the ACC system cannot be set
when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h) or when the vehicle is in FIRST gear.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) sys-
tem on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In
addition, the proximity warning does not acti-
vate and no alarm will sound even if you are
too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be
sure to maintain a safe distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be
aware which mode is selected.
4
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph
(24 km/h) (manual transmission only)
The clutch is pressed for more than 10
seconds (manual transmission only)
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more
than 10 seconds (manual transmission only)
The driver shifts to FIRST gear (manual trans-
mission only)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the
RES button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for pre-
vailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to fol-
low these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster displays the ACC Set With
Target Light. The system will then adjust vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor
The distance setting is changed
The system disengages Ú page 173
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following a vehicle
ahead, your vehicle will resume motion, without
any driver interaction, if the vehicle ahead
starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill. If the vehicle ahead does
not start moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver needs
to push the RES (resume) button or press the
accelerator pedal to reengage ACC to the
existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately three consecutive
minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and a
chime will sound when conditions temporarily
limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather
conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
4
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Service ACC/FCW” Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene. The
following are examples of these types of
situations:
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
ACC performance may be limited when driving
on hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your
lane depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the lane changing example below,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles,
traveling near the outer edges of the lane or
merging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved to the center of the lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver). For limitations of this
system and recommendations, see
Ú page 183.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
4
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled
at this gear selector position, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear
within the instrument cluster display indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 111. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist ready
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch located below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster display Ú page 111 will show
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (Not in 4WD
Low).
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will remain on.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2- Sec-
ond Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle,
and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
show the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean
sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high
pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or
poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of
snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
4
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with
a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle in the center
of the spare tire.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera
mode is exited and the previous screen appears
again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
or the touchscreen button “X” to disable display
of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the “Backup Camera” button
in the “Controls” menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the
display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated
via the touchscreen button “X”, the transmis-
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
When enabled, fixed guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam
that allows you to you see an on-screen image
of the front view of your vehicle. The image will
be displayed on the touchscreen display along
with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front View Camera
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
The TrailCam System has programmable
settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect system Ú page 211.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the below
methods:
Press the “FWD Camera” button on the
controls screen.
Press the “Forward Facing Camera” button
on the apps menu.
Press the “TrailCam” button on the Off Road
Pages.
Press the “Off Road+” button when “Auto
Launch Off Road+” (if equipped) has been
selected under camera settings.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by
pressing the icon on the Backup Camera
view. The Backup Camera view can also be
activated by pressing the icon on the
TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera Delay turned off) and TrailCam
view is active, the TrailCam mode is exited and
the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera Delay turned on) and the TrailCam
view is active, the TrailCam image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen
button “X” to disable display of the TrailCam
view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated
through the Manual Activation Methods, and
the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to
8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image
is initiated. The image will continue to be
displayed until the display timer exceeds
10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the
TrailCam image will be displayed continu-
ously until deactivated via the touchscreen
button “X”, the transmission is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable the
display of the camera image is made avail-
able ONLY when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE.
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless
of the vehicle speed and time while in 4WD
Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the “Clean Camera” soft button
located on the TrailCam view to wash the
TrailCam. Washer fluid will stop when the
button is released.
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds
at a time while holding the button.
The “Clean Camera” system is not available
when windshield washing is in process.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are
projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam
view based on the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side
of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the
correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn
until you hear one click. This is an indication
that the cap is properly tightened.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly,
the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is tight-
ened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission
control system could result from using an
improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
4
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler
cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or
damaged. If the system detects a malfunction,
the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a
"clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the
odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the problem persists, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on
the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
off.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side
of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the
correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn
until you hear one click. This is an indication
that the cap is properly tightened.
AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
cause severe damage to the engine fuel
system. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel
filter and fuel tank is essential see Ú page 375.
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — DEF Filler
CAUTION!
For diesel engines, only use diesel fuel for
motor vehicles in accordance with EN 590
European specifications. The use of other
products or mixtures may damage the engine
beyond repair and consequently void the war-
ranty, due to the damage caused. If you acci-
dentally introduce other types of fuel into the
tank, do not start the engine. Empty the tank.
If the engine has been run for even an
extremely limited amount of time, you must
not only drain the fuel tank, but the rest of the
supply circuit as well.
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
BULK FUEL STORAGE — DIESEL FUEL
If you store quantities of fuel, good
maintenance of the stored fuel is also essential.
Fuel contaminated with water will promote the
growth of “microbes.” These microbes form
“slime” that will clog the fuel filtration system
and lines. Drain condensation from the supply
tank and change the line filter on a regular
basis.
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start see Ú page 378.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system to meet the
very stringent diesel emissions standards
required by the Environmental Protection
Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce
levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from
engines) that are harmful to our health and the
environment to a near-zero level. A small
quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is
injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst
where, when vaporized, it converts
smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into
harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O),
two natural components of the air we breathe.
You can operate with the comfort that your
vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier
world environment for this and generations to
come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) injection system and a Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the
emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the
following components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
Electronically-heated DEF Lines
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst
enable the achievement of diesel emissions
requirements; while maintaining outstanding
fuel economy, drivability, torque and power
ratings.
For system messages and warnings see
Ú page 111.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
system. You may occasionally hear an
audible clicking noise from under the vehicle
at a stop. This is normal operation.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time
after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation and may be
audible from the rear of the vehicle.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is
kept in temperatures between 10° and 90°F
(-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one
year.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel
spray can cause serious injury or death.
4
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest
temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at
temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The
system has been designed to operate in this
environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know
that:
Any containers or parts that come into
contact with DEF must be DEF compatible
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass,
aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel should
be avoided as they are subject to corrosion
by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument
cluster display) will display the level of DEF
remaining in the tank Ú page 111.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used
in your vehicle.
DEF Fill Procedure
NOTE:
For the correct DEF fluid type see Ú page 438.
1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in
fuel door).
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill
inlet.
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds
to update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. If
you have a fault related to the DEF system,
the gauge may not update to the new level.
See an authorized dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF
tank heater will possibly warm up the DEF
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can
result in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccu-
rate level readings.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start
refilling and stop refilling at the first
shut-off (the shut-off indicates that the
DEF tank is full). Do not proceed with the
refilling, to prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
(Continued)
(Continued)
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label
before pouring the content of the bottle
into the DEF tank.
If systems which cannot be screwed in
(e.g. tanks) are used for refilling, after the
indication appears on the instrument
panel display Ú page 107 fill the DEF
tank with no more than 2 Gallons
(8 liters).
If containers which can be screwed to the
filler are used, the reservoir is full when
the DEF level in the container stops
pouring out. Do not proceed further.
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when
any of the following happen: DEF stops
flowing from the fill bottle into the DEF fill
inlet, DEF splashes out the fill inlet, or a DEF
pump nozzle automatically shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible
damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do
not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below
12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed
to work in temperatures below the DEF
freezing point, however, if the tank is over-
filled and freezes, the system could be
damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area imme-
diately with water and use an absorbent
material to soak up the spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank
as it can result in severe damage to your
engine, including but not limited to failure
of the fuel pump and injectors.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Never add anything other than DEF to the
tank – especially any form of hydrocarbon
such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives,
gasoline, or any other petroleum-based
product. Even a very small amount of these,
less than 100 parts per million or less than
1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contam-
inate the entire DEF system and will require
replacement. If owners use a container,
funnel or nozzle when refilling the tank, it
should either be new or one that is has only
been used for adding DEF. Mopar provides
an attachable nozzle with its DEF for this
purpose.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 192.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of
your vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 192.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your vehi-
cle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded.
4
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue. It typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying
motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Model
GCWR (Gross
Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.0L
Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L
Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.0L Diesel Four–Door 8,427 lbs (3,822 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
4
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should
never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard Ú page 404.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully
secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that
may be difficult for the driver to control. You
could lose control of your vehicle and have
a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance, or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the frame or hook
retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
WARNING! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
Towing Requirements — Tires
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 404.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accel-
erated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
4
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping and backing the trailer in an area away
from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer
towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid
excessive clutch slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK.
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
4
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into (N)
Neutral, automatic transmission must be in
PARK, and manual transmission must be in
gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
Shifting Into (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing:
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
Automatic transmissions must be placed in
PARK for recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be placed in
gear (not in NEUTRAL) for recreational
towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting Into (N)
Neutral” to be certain that the transfer case
is fully in (N) Neutral. Otherwise, internal
damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted
clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The
bumper face bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case (N) Neutral position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case (N) Neutral position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the automatic transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into (N) Neutral.
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal
on manual transmissions) for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with
automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual
transmission in FIRST gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place
manual transmission in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL).
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of (N)
Neutral, the engine should remain off to avoid
gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
or place manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions), and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be cer-
tain that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neu-
tral before recreational towing to prevent
damage to internal parts.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in (N) Neutral and the engine
running. With the transfer case in (N) Neutral
ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting
the transmission into PARK.
4
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage if so equipped.
1. Remove both nuts and bolt from the
underside of the vehicle for each bracket.
Underside Nuts
2. Remove the side step assembly.
Bumper End Cap Removal
The end caps on your vehicle’s front fascia/
bumper can be removed by following the steps
below:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on steel
fascia/bumper only.
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR
bracket (Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap
using a T45 torx bit screw driver. Do not
remove the bolts.
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining 8 bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle
and store it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain
and area before proceeding. There are many
types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice.
Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle's steering, handling and traction.
Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to
successful off-road driving, so always keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a
good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases,
there are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use
your own good judgment on what is safe and
what is not. When on a trail, you should always
be looking ahead for surface obstacles and
changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future
driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start System
be disabled during off-road use.
When To Use 4WD Low Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4WD Low for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low speed pulling power.
This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, steep
inclines, or sand where additional low speed
pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided
when in 4WD Low.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle
(two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs,
or other stepped objects, using light brake
pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle
from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a
vehicle on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission
into a low gear and the transfer case into 4WD
Low if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear
than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a
stop, try turning your steering wheel no more
than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projec-
tiles in an off-road situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or
other combustible materials. The heat from
your vehicle exhaust system could cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4WD Low when operating the
vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware
damage can result.
4
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to
get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your
momentum.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get
through. You should use DRIVE, with the
transfer case in the 4WD Low position to
maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to
a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more
than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth for
additional traction. Mud holes pose an
increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good
practice before entering any mud hole, get out
and determine how deep it is, if there are any
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with
full tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy
spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle's
momentum and do not stop. The key to driving
in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt
maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's
momentum. If you are going to be driving on
large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire
pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to
allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced
tire pressure will drastically improve your
traction and handling while driving on the soft
sand, but you must return the tires to normal air
pressure before driving on pavement or other
hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to
reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many
types of terrain. These varying types of terrain
bring different types of obstacles. Before
proceeding, review the path ahead to determine
the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring
the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the
vehicle forward until it makes contact with the
object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a
light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up
and over the object.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path.
Determining the correct path can be extremely
difficult when you are confronting many
obstacles. In these cases have someone guide
you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have
the person stand a safe distance in front of you
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at
high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss
of control.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire
unseating and total loss of air pressure. To
reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
system loading which could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
where they can see the obstacle, watch your
tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
which ensures you drive over the largest of
them with your tires. This will lift your
undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of
the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall
and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large
rocks with your tires.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or
Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or
a large rut, the angled approach is the key to
maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let
each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when
crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do
not attempt to cross any large obstacle with
steep sides at an angle great enough to put the
vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in
a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the
turnout you just created. You should now be
able to drive out following the trench you just
created at a 45-degree angle.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows
one front tire to be on top of the log while the
other just starts to climb the log. While climbing
the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires.
Then ease the vehicle off the log using your
brakes.
Getting High-Centered
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object,
get out of the vehicle and try to determine what
the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting
the underbody and what is the best direction to
recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are
in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a
few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of
the high point when you let the vehicle down.
You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching
the vehicle off the object.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is
large enough to strike your axles or under-
carriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is
large enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep
sides.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance
or the vehicle will become high-centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard
objects increases the risk of underbody dam-
age.
4
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a
good understanding of your abilities and your
vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious
problems. Some are just too steep to climb and
should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities.
You should always climb hills straight up and
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or
steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to
see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is
the trail straight up and down? What is on top
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can
you safely recover the vehicle if something goes
wrong? If everything looks good and you feel
confident, shift the transmission into a lower
gear with 4WD Low engaged, and proceed with
caution, maintaining your momentum as you
climb the hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to
proceed and have shifted into the appropriate
gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant
throttle and apply more power as you start up
the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade;
the abrupt change of grade could cause you to
lose control. If the front end begins to bounce,
ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires
back on the ground. As you approach the crest
of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly
proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip
as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the
accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh
"bite" into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in
REVERSE and back straight down the grade
using engine resistance along with the vehicle
brakes.
Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to
determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent?
Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is
there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to
regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If
you feel confident in your ability to proceed,
then make sure you are in 4WD Low and
proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to
control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or
turn around on a steep grade. Driving across
an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL.
Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
braking. Descending a grade too fast could
cause you to lose control and be seriously
injured or killed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline.
If it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities.
Driving across an incline places more weight on
the downhill wheels, which increases the
possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make
sure the surface has good traction with firm and
stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at
an angle heading slightly up or down.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brake.
Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires
to lock.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type
of water. Water crossings should be avoided, if
possible, and only be attempted when
necessary in a safe, responsible manner. Only
drive through areas which are designated and
approved. Tread lightly and avoid damage to the
environment. Know your vehicle's abilities and
be able to recover it if something goes wrong.
Never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
deep water unless you ingested water into the
engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested
water first. The key to any crossing is low and
slow. Shift into FIRST gear (manual
transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the
4WD Low position and proceed very slowly with
a constant slow speed of {3 to 5 mph (5 to
8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep the
vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
the crossing. After crossing any water higher
than the bottom of the axle differentials, inspect
all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
ingestion.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of
a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle,
which may result in severe injury. Always back
carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE.
Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only
the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally
across a hill, always drive straight up or down.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmis-
sion, transfer case, engine or vehicle inte-
rior can occur if you drive too fast or
through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or
other vehicle components, and your brakes
will be less effective once wet and/or
muddy.
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check
all fluids afterward. Driving through water
may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
4
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to
determine if you can cross it safely and
responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk
through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of
murky or muddy waters; check for hidden
obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding
on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle
if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the
water depth, current and bottom conditions. On
soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively
increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the
depth and the ability to safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or
Other Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water
areas normally contain murky or muddy waters.
These water types normally contain hidden
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and
bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior
to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and
easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to
determine you can safely cross, than proceed
using the low and slow method.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Other Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous.
Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or
river even in shallow water. Fast moving water
can easily push your vehicle downstream,
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow
water, a high current can still wash the dirt out
from around your tires putting you and your
vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of
personal injury and vehicle damage with slower
water currents in depths greater than the
vehicle's running ground clearance. You should
never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle's running ground
clearance. Even the slowest current can push
the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of
control if the water is deep enough to push on
the large surface area of the vehicle's body.
Before you proceed, determine the speed of the
current, the water's depth, approach angle,
bottom condition and if there are any obstacles.
Then cross at an angle heading slightly
upstream using the low and slow technique.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the
radiator.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It
can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping
it out of control. This could put you and your
passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual
transmission bell housing for mud and debris
and clean as required.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
4
210
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to the
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
MULTIMEDIA 211
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or an authorized dealer may
contact you directly regarding software
updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” Ú page 132.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen and Faceplate
Buttons
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display,
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display, and the
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
212 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button
at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting “option” until a check mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The avail-
able languages are English, Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the sys-
tem set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically
adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to
adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
MULTIMEDIA 213
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Time-Out
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Auto Launch With Off-Road+
This setting will determine whether the vehicle will start up with
Off-Road+ activated. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pres-
sure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque” (Nm or
lb-ft) units of measurement independently.
5
214 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The
“Always” setting will also show the command list. The “With Help” setting
will show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The sys-
tem will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
MULTIMEDIA 215
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar/Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when shift-
ing out of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the fixed backup camera guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the forward facing camera guidelines on or off.
5
216 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To
access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or
off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only”
setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected.
The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warn-
ing alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected.
The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is
closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have a FCW system signal
when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The avail-
able settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The avail-
able settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
MULTIMEDIA 217
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when shift-
ing out of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the Active Backup Camera Guide Lines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the Fixed Backup Camera Guide Lines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the forward facing camera guidelines on or off.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
5
218 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the head-
lights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Interior Ambient Lights This setting will allow you to turn on or off the interior ambient lights.
Headlight Illumination On Approach/Illuminated Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the head-
lights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wiper are activated.
Auto Dim High Beams/Automatic High Beam Headlamps This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle reaches speeds of 12 mph (19 km/h).
MULTIMEDIA 219
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock/Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start/Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/ 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the unlock but-
ton.
Passive Entry — If Equipped
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Setting Name Description
5
220 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
AUX Switches — If Equipped
When the AUX button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches:
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heat Seat & Steering Wheel — If Equipped
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats (if
equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the com-
fort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate
the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX
switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power
source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or
from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you
can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX
switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or
“Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and
the power source is set to Ignition.
MULTIMEDIA 221
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
After pressing the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Doors On Key Off Power Delay/Doors On Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned on. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay/Doors Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
5
222 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher set-
ting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The avail-
able settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings
are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default),
and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
MULTIMEDIA 223
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Clus-
ter Display.
Smartphone Projection Manager — If Equipped
This setting will activate your smartphone to be projected on the vehicle’s
touchscreen.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Info
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
5
224 MULTIMEDIA
Reset/Restore Settings
When the Reset/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back
to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
Setting Name Description
Reset App Drawer To Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Apps
This setting will restore all installed apps. This feature is used if there is
an issue using or installing apps.
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all per-
sonal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
Map Update
This will display different ways to update maps of the radio into your sys-
tem. “Download System Information To USB” or “Generate Request
Code” will appear as the two options to select from.
MULTIMEDIA 225
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Phone Button
4 — Volume & On/Off Button
5 — Mute Button
6 — Compass Button
7 — Settings Button
8 — More Button
9 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
10 — Screen Off Button
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Climate Button
4 — Apps Button
5 — Controls Button
6 — Phone Button
7 — Settings Button
5
226 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 228.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system Ú page 241.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 211.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio sys-
tem off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the Volume & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds
to reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen
from freezing or being stuck.
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
MULTIMEDIA 227
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your
preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. See an authorized dealer for
repair.
Controls
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated
seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
control functions Ú page 54.
Feature Description
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
5
228 MULTIMEDIA
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 446.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
MULTIMEDIA 229
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
4 — Seek Down
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Seek Up
8 — Audio Settings
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse Button
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Bar
5
230 MULTIMEDIA
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio
Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn
on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left steering
wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available
station or channel. During a Seek Up/Down
function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up
or Seek Down button to advance the
radio through the available stations or channels
at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next
available station or channel when the button on
the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information
related to the currently playing song and radio
station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
MULTIMEDIA 231
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel
and wait for the beep to say a command. See
some examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill
at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
5
232 MULTIMEDIA
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://
www.siriusxm.ca/ or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
MULTIMEDIA 233
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay
time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The radio then uses this information to alert you
when either the favorite artist or song is being
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play
button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of
five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point
at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in
steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the
content is previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen also forwards the
content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is
release.
Live Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
5
234 MULTIMEDIA
Browse In SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located
at the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
MULTIMEDIA 235
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Team Or Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Select Team or Add/Delete button on
the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll
list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of
all teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered button
on the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen.
You can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
5
236 MULTIMEDIA
Preset Features — If Equipped
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/
Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down
Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the
Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio
button. You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the X button.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
MULTIMEDIA 237
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direc-
tion as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
5
238 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
Info button on the touchscreen for artist
information on the current song playing.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the Media button
located on the faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB port, or by selecting the USB
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped) or by pushing
the MEDIA button on the faceplate and then
selecting the USB button.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Browse
4 — Source
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Info
7 — More Options
1 — Repeat
2 — Select Source
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Bluetooth®
7 — Tracks
MULTIMEDIA 239
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you
insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the unit
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
display will show the track number and index
time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at
the start of track 1.
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
Media button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 241.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or
under the Source Select button (if equipped) or
pushing the Media button on the faceplate and
then selecting the Source button and then the
AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
5
240 MULTIMEDIA
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is
within the first second of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the device.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 229.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to
highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
MULTIMEDIA 241
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
It allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
5
242 MULTIMEDIA
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your
signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command
works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
MULTIMEDIA 243
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of
the VR button or the Phone button.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect
Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth®-
enabled mobile phone. Mobile
phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
5
244 MULTIMEDIA
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the
MULTIMEDIA 245
Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
For information on how to pair a Bluetooth®
streaming audio device with the Uconnect 3
With 5-inch Display radio Ú page 243.
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent device
paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
5
246 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
MULTIMEDIA 247
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen,
and then select the appropriate number.
Press the Down Arrow button next to the
selected number to display the option’s
pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
5
248 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
MULTIMEDIA 249
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
5
250 MULTIMEDIA
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button
on the Phone main screen to combine all calls
into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the
Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
MULTIMEDIA 251
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previously answered
incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phonebook. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traf-
fic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60> min-
utes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
5
252 MULTIMEDIA
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have
the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri
lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone
is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON
mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least
15 seconds prior to using the system
Ú page 446.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher
powered smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful
information, and organizes it into simple cards
that appear just when they are needed. Android
Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class
speech technology, the steering wheel controls,
the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,
and the radio display’s touchscreen to control
many of your apps. To use Android Auto™,
perform the following procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in the app begins to download.
Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time
you use the app.
MULTIMEDIA 253
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Android
Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately
once a compatible device is connected. You can
also launch it by pressing the Android Auto™
icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communi-
cation
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition
(VR) button on the steering wheel
until the beep or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Google to take you to a
desired destination by voice. You can also touch
the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
other navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https://
www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access,
stream, and play your favorite music
with apps like Google Play Music,
iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio
playable application. Using your smartphone’s
data plan, you can stream endless music on the
road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™.
5
254 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
system’s media screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push
and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate voice
recognition specific to Android Auto™.
This allows you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Android
Auto™.
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/
to see the latest list of available apps for
Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports,
using the factory-provided USB cable, and press
the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on
the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
MULTIMEDIA 255
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately.
You can also launch it by pressing the Apple
CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition
session. You can also press and hold
the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or
listen to voicemail as you normally would using
Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not func-
tion with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
all your artists, playlists, and music
from iTunes® or any third party
application installed on your device.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Apple CarPlay®
5
256 MULTIMEDIA
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply
to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
text messages, but drivers will not be able to
read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel until the beep or tap
the Microphone icon to ask Apple®
Siri to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access
Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible
apps that are available to use, every time it is
launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the
app through your mobile device for it to work
with Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/
carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of
available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
MULTIMEDIA 257
connections to function. The connected device
is unavailable to other devices when connected
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System — If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another
device can also be paired to the Uconnect
system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so
the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
launched from the front and center console
USB ports only.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF
EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?
Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are
connected vehicles. These buttons will be
located on either the rearview mirror or
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you
have a connected radio and can take
advantage of the many connected vehicle
features.
For further information about the ASSIST and
SOS buttons Ú page 344.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of
SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection,
transmission and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 280.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
And Business Hours
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/ or call
1-877-324-9091
Uconnect Phone Customer Support
UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call:
1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
(English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Business Hours
Central Time
Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to 10:00 pm
Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
5
258 MULTIMEDIA
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline
communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
compatible with your device. SiriusXM
Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental
United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and
Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent upon an operative telematics
device, a cellular connection, navigation map
data, and GPS satellite signal reception,
which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency
support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
delivery are hills, structures, buildings,
tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical
system or other important parts of your
vehicle, network congestion, civil distur-
bances, actions of third parties or the govern-
ment, Internet failure, and/or the physical
location of your vehicle, such as in an under-
ground parking structure or under a bridge.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are
available for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and
remote start your vehicle from virtually
anywhere by using the Uconnect App or your
computer.
Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App.
Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map
and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Uconnect App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
The SOS Call button connects you directly to
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email
address to activate services in your vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 259
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
services starting on the date of vehicle
purchase. To get started with your trial,
enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of
SiriusXM Guardian™ services from your date of
purchase.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you’re
only a few steps away from using connected
services.
Uconnect Mobile App
Download the Uconnect app to your mobile
device.
Use your Owner Account login and password
to open the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in the United States, visit
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/
Register button in the upper right-hand
corner to register your account online.
a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification
to confirm/verify your newly created
account.
1 — Settings
2 — Vehicle Info
3 — Location And Send & Go
4 — Remote Commands
5
260 MULTIMEDIA
d. After clicking the email link, it will take
you to a website and prompt you to
assign your account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN.
For customers in Canada, register your
account via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom
menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from
the apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
mation email will be sent to the provided
email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the
confirmation email. It may take a short
time before remote services will be avail-
able, but you will be able to log into the
Uconnect App and the owner’s site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set
up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle
Start, and activate your horn and lights
remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides
you with all the information you need, all in one
place. You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle,
watch videos about your vehicle's features, and
easily access your manuals. It is also where you
can manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account.
This section will familiarize you with the key
elements of the website that will help you get
the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
For customers in the United States, press the
Sign In/Register button and enter your email
address and password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle
Health Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will
then prompt you to log in using your email
address and password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact
information, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile
button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if
equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the
horn and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
MULTIMEDIA 261
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail
to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
and then “Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™”
where can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can
customize the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in
contact with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent in the event of an emergency. When
the connection between the vehicle and the live
agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
transmit location information. In the event of a
minor collision, medical or any other
emergency, press the SOS button to be
connected to a call center agent who can send
emergency assistance to your vehicle’s
location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on an operational Uconnect system,
cellular network availability that is compatible
with the device in your vehicle, and GPS
network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM
Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
light will turn green indicating a call has
been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or press the Cancel button on the
touchscreen within 10 seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through your mobile
device versus the hands-free system which is
not available due to the SOS Call.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, includ-
ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call
will NOT work without a network connection
compatible with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
5
262 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
is made, the agent will stay on the line with
you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may
have limited services. In particular, responses
to SOS calls or other emergency services may
be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any
reason (including during or after an accident)
the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
systems, will not operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be
registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G
(data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent
your vehicle from placing an emergency
call.
MULTIMEDIA 263
(Continued)
(Continued)
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device.
These features include locking/unlocking,
remote starting, and activating the horn and
lights of the vehicle.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency
call. To avoid interference that can cause
the SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ SERVICES
WILL OPERATE.
WARNING! (Continued)
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the air bag system is detected. If the
Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air
bag system may not be working properly
and the SOS Call system may not be able to
send a signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care center. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle
immediately.
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services if
needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
the SOS Call system immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
264 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Commands
Remote Commands lets you send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and
Uconnect App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care (not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Uconnect App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon
on your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your
Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links
are provided on the website to help you retrieve
them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command to by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to
activate that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
1 — Lock: Press this button to lock your vehicle.
2 — Vehicle Start: Press this button to start your
vehicle.
3 — Horn & Lights: Press this button to sound the
horn and activate your lights.
4 — Unlock: Press this button to unlock your vehicle.
5 — Cancel Vehicle Start: Press this button to
cancel remote start.
MULTIMEDIA 265
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command was received by
your vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle
through the Uconnect App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-
bility to protect your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
If using the Uconnect App to command your
vehicle, your device must be compatible and
be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start
and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will
not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
the ignition key is on or during an emergency
call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed
via your Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect
App on your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
with the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance. Once started, the preset climate
controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool
down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not
entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Start.
5
266 MULTIMEDIA
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob
within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been
armed and not triggered since the last
vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are
closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank
of fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an auto-
matic transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the
vehicle must be started at least once after
alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
or noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications
every time a command is sent to turn on the
horn and lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
the surroundings when using this feature. You
are responsible for compliance with local laws,
rules and ordinances in the location of your
vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Roadside Assistance Call
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
system feature will contain an ASSIST button in
the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™
services have been activated, the ASSIST
button can connect you directly to customer
care call centers. You will be directed to one of
the four services below.
Roadside Assist — If you get a flat tire or need
a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who
can help anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has
expired, and for in-vehicle support for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ system or help
answering any general questions
surrounding your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features,
such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 267
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle
and you will be presented with your ASSIST
options on the touchscreen. Make your
selection by pressing the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
monitor your conversations with Roadside
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
of information obtained through any such call
recordings.
Send & Go
Description
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device, and then send the route to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
Send & Go
5
268 MULTIMEDIA
Send & Go Input
How It Works
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the
destination.
There are multiple ways to find a destina-
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at
the bottom of the App, press the search box
to browse through one of the categories pro-
vided, or type the name or keyword in the
search box at the top of the App. You can
also select categories such as Favorites or
Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current loca-
tion.
Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app.
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle
by pressing the Send To Vehicle option on
the pop-up that appears on the radio
touchscreen.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or
Uconnect 4C NAV unit.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators
1 — Activate Services (Connected Services)
2 — Navigation Button
MULTIMEDIA 269
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
LTE Network Connection
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary
vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights
to make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of
your vehicle.
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the
information by pressing the layers button.
These options will appear:
Vehicle Finder Layers
1 — Map View
2 — Satellite View
3 — Hybrid View
4 — Show Traffic
5 — View Boundaries
5
270 MULTIMEDIA
3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see
your location.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
map a route to your vehicle.
NOTE:
You are responsible for using remote
services that sound horn and flash lights in
accordance with the laws, rules and ordi-
nances in effect at the location of your
vehicle.
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network
availability that is compatible with the device
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Requirements
Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in
motion.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever
you are. After you've made your purchase, turn
on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop
or any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets
anyone on your private network access the
Web — great for working and relaxing.
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your
Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an
internet access hotspot in the vehicle,
using the radio as an access point.
The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle
devices (such as a laptop or any other
portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a
complimentary 3-month trial period that
includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be
activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
MULTIMEDIA 271
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the
How To Purchase button and follow the
instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link
to the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers:
Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an
AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist
you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you
can change its name and the password by
selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing
the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also
view the connected devices from the app
screen by pressing the View Connected Devices
button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not
required in order to purchase and use the 4G
Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
number (as issued by your local law enforce-
ment). If you have downloaded the
Uconnect App, you can push the “Settings”
menu button on your device, select “Help”,
and then select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
tomer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement
with whom you filed the stolen vehicle
report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
work with your local law enforcement to
locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is
ongoing, you should also contact your
insurance company to inform it of the
situation.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws.
You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the fea-
tures and applications in this vehicle when it
is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result
in an accident involving in serious injury or
death.
5
272 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will
be sent to you every month so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for regular maintenance to your
vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle
may collect and transmit vehicle data to
SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your
vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins
when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription unless you call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell
them to deactivate your Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/
privacy-policy.
Vehicle Health Alert
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
senses a problem with one of your vehicle’s key
systems. For further information, go to your
Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to
register and activate services. During this
process you will be asked to provide an email
address to which the reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to
remind you when services are needed, or to
alert you of other important information, such
as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK
to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to
speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up
screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the
In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete
messages.
MULTIMEDIA 273
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®!
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly
to your vehicle using Alexa®.
If you need assistance, you can always ask
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands
by saying: “Alexa®, ask <brand name> for help
with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can
ask Alexa®:
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to send
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
to my <vehicle name>.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first, register
for SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 258.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle
to Amazon Alexa®:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to
SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account
credentials. This will be the same user
name and password you used when
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™
Connected Services.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand>
Skill on Alexa®!
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™
phones, iPhone® devices, or voice-activated
speakers, like Google Home. If you need
assistance, ask Google for help, or for a
complete list of commands by saying: “Hey
Google, ask <brand name> for help with my
car.”
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
to my <vehicle name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
5
274 MULTIMEDIA
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant
app on your smart phone from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google
Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your
account by pressing the icon in the upper
right hand corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle
brand name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
and password you created when you
activated Uconnect services.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
linking process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a
remote start
Send a destination to their vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel
level and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving
and give you peace of mind when your loved
ones are out on the road. You can set boundary
limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the
Uconnect app to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your
vehicle is driven either out of or into a
geographic boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being
driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your
vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile
radius of a valet drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
To get started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Uconnect app from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
using the username and password you
created when you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your
SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering
your security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
and more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
channel for SmartWatch Integration.
MULTIMEDIA 275
Uconnect Market
With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless
and secure transactions from the comfort of
your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations,
place food orders, or pay for other goods and
services right from the vehicle’s touchscreen.
To get started with Uconnect Market on the
touchscreen:
1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect
App drawer.
2. Press “Get Started”.
3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your
phone number to receive a text message
with instructions on how to set up Uconnect
Market.
NOTE:
If the text message does not come through,
press the Resend Text button. It might take a
minute to receive the text message.
4. Once you receive the text message, press
the link provided. You will be directed to a
sign-in screen. Enter your email and
password. You will then be able to use
Uconnect Market.
5. If you do not have an account, press
“Register Now” to create one.
6. Accept the Uconnect market Terms of
Service.
7. Enter your credit card information, and
press “Next”.
8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”.
9. The system will verify the phone number.
Once verified, Uconnect Market will be
available to use. Press the OK button.
From the online portal, https://
market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty
accounts and start receiving benefits from them
while still using Uconnect Market and view your
purchase history.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen
to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your call will be
directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held
in a queue until an agent is available. If you do
not have an active subscription, push the
ASSIST button and click the Activate button on
the touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror?
You have 10
seconds after pushing the SOS Call button
to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either
push the SOS Call button again, or press
the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use
the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
Certain vehicle information, such as make
and model, is transmitted along with the
last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You
can use the SOS Call button to make a call
if you or someone else needs emergency
assistance.
5
276 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take up to three minutes or more for
the request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door
more quickly, however its range is limited
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for
these and other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile
devices, which is why security measures
have been engineered into the Uconnect
App. Asking for your username, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote
services through your mobile device. It is
your responsibility to protect your
passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is
compatible with most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The
Uconnect App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G
(data), or 5G (data) network connection. If
either your device or your vehicle is in an
area with below average coverage, it may
take longer to log in and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
the engine, the pop-up message stating that
you have a new route will appear. There is
an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
the pop-up message offers a “Locations”
option. Once “Locations” is selected, you
can choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is
MULTIMEDIA 277
your responsibility to guard your PIN
accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for
more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button.
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To
enhance your privacy, and the privacy of
others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle
police report is required for you to activate
this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™
locate your vehicle. We may also locate the
vehicle for other law enforcement or
government agencies, subject to a valid
court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
do so. We will also provide the service for
FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you
have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
your vehicle is recovered, you will be
contacted by law enforcement.
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my
insurance rates? Some insurance providers
offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with
systems that can deter auto theft. When
shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ services subscription to find out
if the insurance provider can offer you a
lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle
and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions,
it can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will remote start your
vehicle more quickly. However its range is
limited. For example, when you are leaving
the stadium after the game, you can use the
Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle
and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their
wireless devices, which is why security
measures have been engineered into the
Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
your vehicle if they happen to find your
device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle
using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still
requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The
5
278 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Start feature simply starts the
engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop
the vehicle.
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and
flash the lights quicker; however its range is
limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn &
Lights will continue for a maximum of three
minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM
Guardian™ account? There are three ways
that you can register your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Account:
Push the Assist button. A call will be
placed to an agent who can assist in
registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Select the button to speak
with an agent, who can assist in regis-
tering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Enter your email on the
touchscreen and then follow the prompts
from the provided email. You will receive
an email with an activation link that will
be good for 72 hours. Once you click the
activation link, you will be prompted to fill
out your information and accept Terms
and Conditions. Then, you will be directed
to the SiriusXM Guardian™ home page to
complete your profile and demo the
remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without
an email address, customers cannot
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers
need to register so they can subscribe to
receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for
remote command requests.
MULTIMEDIA 279
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN during the
registration process. The SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to
authenticate you when accessing your
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s
Site.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can
be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your
Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile >
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
your personal information. Make your edits
and click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for
certain Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription
comes up for renewal? If you have added a
credit card to your account information,
your subscription will be automatically
renewed for a term length in accordance
with the service plan that you have selected
at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you
cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind
you that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
12. How do I update my credit card
information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter of no-
tification.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided
5
280 MULTIMEDIA
from the date of cancellation for annual
plans or longer. Please see the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for
refunds related to billing plans of other
lengths and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it
expires? Yes. If you have an annual
subscription, your subscription will be
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will
be canceled on the last day of the month in
which you choose to cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all
personal information, returns the Uconnect
system to its original factory settings,
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
and account information. To remove your
account information from the Uconnect
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease
vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection compatible with my device is
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
not connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network.
Services that required your smartphone
only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call
may be functioning if you have an operable
network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits
data which may include information about your
vehicle, your vehicle’s health and performance,
your vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data. The
collection, use and sharing of this information is
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
services and is further described by the
Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
This information may be collected by SiriusXM®
Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared
with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
diagnostic information including location data
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle
Health Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
information, including location data, may still be
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the Uconnect Services including
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your
consent to the collection, use and disclosure of
this information in accordance with the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared,
you must cancel your Uconnect services in their
entirety by contacting us as referenced in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy.
MULTIMEDIA 281
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 446.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
if your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages,
it will provide you vehicle status while operating
on off-road conditions. It supplies information
relating to the status of the drivetrain, transfer
case, coolant/oil gauges, pitch and roll of the
vehicle and access to the trailcam system.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen, and then select
“Off-Road Pages”.
Main Menu
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
5
282 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in
each of the three selectable page options. It
provides continually updating information for
the following items:
Current Transfer Case Status
Current Latitude/Longitude
Current Altitude of the vehicle
Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control
and Selected Speed in MPH (km/h)
Status of Off-Road+ Mode
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
DRIVETRAIN
The Drivetrain page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Sway Bar
3 — Front Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
MULTIMEDIA 283
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only),
Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll
gauges provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
TRAILCAM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam
that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
front view of your vehicle. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the TrailCam button on the
touchscreen.
TrailCam Activation
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Transmission Temperature (Automatic
Transmissions Only)
5 — Battery Voltage
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
5
284
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the
stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
SAFETY 285
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill
Descent Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support
(RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer
Sway Control (TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driv-
ing on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
6
286 SAFETY
(Continued)
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped) Ú page 286.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other vehi-
cles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
SAFETY 287
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
“ESC On” is the normal operating mode for the
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC
system will be in this mode. This mode should
be used for most driving conditions. Alternate
ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to “ESC On”.
Full Off — If Equipped
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only and should not be used on
any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the ESC OFF switch for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate, and the “ESC Off” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is
active when "Full Off" mode is enabled by the
driver, ESC will not switch to "Partial Off" mode
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated
and unevenly worn tires may also degrade
ESC performance. Any vehicle modification
or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces
the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
288 SAFETY
at any speed and will remain in "Full Off" mode
until Off Road+ is exited or ESC is re-enabled by
the driver.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is turned to the “ESC On” mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (km) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
the customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is place in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by
actively controlling the brakes.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
SAFETY 289
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low.
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed. (If doors are
attached, then door must be closed. If doors
are detached, then driver seat belt must be
buckled.)
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if
doors are attached or driver seat belt is
unbuckled if doors are detached.)
6
290 SAFETY
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an indicator light, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
flash for several seconds then extinguish
when the driver pushes the HDC switch but
enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
flash for several seconds then extinguish
when HDC disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
flash when HDC deactivates due to over-
heated brakes. The flashing will stop and
HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll
back from a complete stop while on an incline.
If the driver releases the brake while stopped on
an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does
not apply the throttle before this time expires,
the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed. (If the doors
are attached, then the door must be closed.
If the doors are detached then the driver's
seat belt must be buckled.)
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
be attentive to distance to other vehicles,
people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of
the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehi-
cle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
SAFETY 291
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, refer to Ú page 111
for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in
4WD Low only. SSC maintains vehicle
speed by actively controlling engine
torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable SSC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate
automatically once the following conditions are
met:
The driver releases the throttle.
The driver releases the brake.
The transmission is in any selection other
than PARK.
Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
6
292 SAFETY
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be
reduced when climbing a grade and the level of
set speed reduction depends on the magnitude
of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set
speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is
used for SSC target speed selection but will
not affect the gear chosen by the transmis-
sion. While actively controlling SSC, the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding
driving conditions.
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+
drive mode if active. The differences may be
notable to the driver as a varying level of
aggressiveness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
The driver overrides SSC set speed with
throttle or brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h). SSC will exist immediately.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC switch has a lamp that offers feedback to
the driver about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when SSC is
enabled or activated. These are the normal
operating conditions for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the SSC switch but enabled
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
overheated brakes.
SAFETY 293
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected,
the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power
to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions Ú page 193.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
E
QUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors,
located inside the taillights, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in
off-road conditions. The driver must remain
attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
6
294 SAFETY
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of
the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear Ú page 211.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
The area on taillights, where the radar sensors
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM
system can function properly. Do not block the
taillights where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume Ú page 297.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
SAFETY 295
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
6
296 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 446.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be care-
ful when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
SAFETY 297
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the
driver with audible warnings, visual warnings
(within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a haptic warning in the form of a brake
jerk, to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are
intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings as well as a possible haptic warning in the
form of a brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
6
298 SAFETY
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 446.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect
display in the control settings Ú page 211.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential colli-
sion. In rare situations, the system may react
to surrounding objects such as tunnels,
bridges, guard rails etc. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by con-
trolling the vehicle via braking, steering, and
acceleration. Unintended braking reactions
can always be overridden by pressing down
hard on the accelerator. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
SAFETY 299
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the
system from warning the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW
is set to “off”, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”,
this prevents the system from providing
limited active braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking adequately
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut-
down.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
system Ú page 211.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible more distant
collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status
is “Only Warning”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
"Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time
than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may
prefer this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
6
300 SAFETY
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until
the tire is inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 404 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to
turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value
Ú page 446.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
SAFETY 301
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure,
unless your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill
Alert or Selectable Tire Fill Alert feature.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels, and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance.
Customers are encouraged to use Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to
ensure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
6
302 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-
ings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low"
message for a minimum of five seconds, an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values
in the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to their original color, and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message
will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With a Full-Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it
has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when
swapped with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size
spare tire is swapped with a low pressure
road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
still show the TPMS Warning Light to be on,
SAFETY 303
a chime to sound, an Inflate to XX message
to appear in the instrument cluster, and the
graphic display will still show the low tire
pressure value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the
TPMS Warning Light as long as none of road
tires are below the low pressure warning
threshold.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message in the
instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in
place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the
next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard
tire pressure is attained while inflating or
deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable
the Tire Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the
Uconnect system.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when
using the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if
an existing TPMS system fault is set to
“active” or if the system is in deactivation
mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
detects an increase in tire pressure while filling
the tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode with the transmission in PARK for
vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, the park brake must be
applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard
lamps do not come on while inflating the tire,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor
may be in an inoperative position, preventing
the TPM sensor signal from being received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved
slightly forward or backward.
6
304 SAFETY
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overfilled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the
tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire
is then underinflated and will continue to
chirp every five seconds if the user continues
to deflate the tire.
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA)— If Equipped
The STFA system is an optional feature that is
included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert
system. The system is designed to allow you to
select a pressure to inflate or deflate the
vehicle's front and rear axle tires to, and to
provide feedback while inflating or deflating the
vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application,
which is located in the apps menu of the
Uconnect system, you will be able to select a
pressure setting for both the front and rear axle
tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure
range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for
each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values
for the front and rear axles as shown on the
vehicle placard pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for
each axle in the Uconnect system application as
preset pressure values. Up to two sets of preset
pressure values can be stored in the Uconnect
system for the front and rear axle. Once you
select the tire pressures for the front and rear
axles that you want to inflate or deflate to, you
can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a
time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPMS
receiver module detects a change in tire
pressure. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, with the transmission in PARK in vehicles
with an automatic transmission, and in
NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in
vehicles with a manual transmission. The
hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire
pressure screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. If the hazard lamps do not
come on while inflating or deflating the tire, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor may be
in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS
sensor signal from being received. In this case,
the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the
following STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
pressure is reached to let you know when
to stop inflating or deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
over-inflated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is added or removed to reach proper
selected pressure level.
SAFETY 305
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 326.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 326.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 443 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
306 SAFETY
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
SAFETY 307
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
WARNING! (Continued)
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
308 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
SAFETY 309
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
6
310 SAFETY
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
SAFETY 311
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. The
figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position Ú page 336.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Locations (Two-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Locations (Four-Door Models)
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
6
312 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SAFETY 313
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 122.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a colli-
sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
6
314 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification
System (OCS) in the front passenger seat. The
OCS is designed to activate or deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending
on the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed
to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants
whose seated weight classifies them in a
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
SAFETY 315
(Continued)
category other than a properly seated adult.
This could be a child, teenager, or even an
adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator
Light (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger
when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illuminates
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show
that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat,
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
deploy even though the Passenger Air Bag
Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illu-
minated.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
316 SAFETY
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to activate or
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag depending on the occupant’s seated
weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an
unoccupied seat and for occupants whose
seated weight classifies them in a category
other than a properly seated adult. This could
be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Consists Of The Following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light – an amber light located on the over-
head sports bar
Air Bag Warning Light
Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether it should activate or
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger
to be seated properly and properly wearing the
seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seat back
and the seat back in an upright position
Seated Properly
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects in it.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
child, including a child seated in a
forward-facing child restraint or booster seat.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child or small
adult.
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
SAFETY 317
(Continued)
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located on
the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and
front passenger when the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator
light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag
Disabled Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat*Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other rela-
tively light objects
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat**
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
318 SAFETY
(Continued)
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.
When the front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat
and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD indicator light is NOT
illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be
illuminated when an adult passenger is properly
seated in the front passenger seat. The driver
and adult passenger should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult
is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult
is not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may deactivate and the PAD
Indicator Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated
and the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
should be deactivated for most properly seated
and restrained children in the passenger seat
and for most properly installed child restraint
systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint
system, the PAD Indicator Light may not be
illuminated, even though the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can
occur if the child restraint is lighter than the
lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD
Indicator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the
PAD Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An
Adult Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front
passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is
illuminated, the passenger may be sitting
improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the
OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated
weight to activate the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult
passenger step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the
passenger seat, such as cushions, pads,
seat covers, seat massagers, blankets,
extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright
position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of
the seat, with the passenger’s feet
comfortably on or near the floor, and with
their back against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger
remain in this seated position for two to
three minutes after restarting the vehicle.
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illumi-
nated for an adult passenger, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF," the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy in
the event of a collision.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
SAFETY 319
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the passenger seat, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be
deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be
activated for a lighter weight passenger,
including a small adult (depending on size) who
is seated in the passenger seat. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the
PAD Indicator Light as a determination of
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
is activated or deactivated. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front
passenger seat, have the passenger reposition
his or her body in the seat until the PAD
Indicator Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front
Passenger’s Seated Weight On The Front
Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in deactivation or activation of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in deactivation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious injury or
death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in
activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. Examples of improper front passenger
seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
320 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
SAFETY 321
(Continued)
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate
whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
passenger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the
operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag
Warning Light does not come on, or stays on
after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bags to protect you in a colli-
sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate to show that
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
remain deactivated until the fault is
cleared. This indicates that you should take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
322 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover, or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
SAFETY 323
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
6
324 SAFETY
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
ers cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller System serviced as well.
SAFETY 325
(Continued)
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the START or ON/OFF position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid
Supplement”for additional information.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
6
326 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
SAFETY 327
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-
grown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
328 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
SAFETY 329
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child prop-
erly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt cor-
rectly.
6
330 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
SAFETY 331
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
332 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
bined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or for-
ward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat man-
ufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s man-
ual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center posi-
tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages
from the outboard seating positions?
Two Door Models – N/A
Four Door Models – Yes
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints
with flexible lower anchors in the center posi-
tion. The inner anchorages are 18.5 inches
(484 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
SAFETY 333
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it (Two-Door
Models).
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion. If your vehicle is equipped with
anchorage symbols on the seatback, they will
be located just above the lower anchorages.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door Models — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be
removed if it interferes with the installation of
the child restraint.
For further information, see Ú page 40.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
6
334 SAFETY
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat, near
the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
Four-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
SAFETY 335
6
(Continued)
Center Seat LATCH
Two-Door Models:
Four-Door Models:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 336 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 339 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating
position. Do not use the center lower LATCH
anchorages to install a child seat in the cen-
ter of the back seat.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. If you
are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in
the outboard positions.
Please see Ú page 335 for typical installa-
tion instructions.
WARNING! (Continued)
336 SAFETY
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” Ú page 311 for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations (Two-Door
Models)
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 337
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations (Four-Door
Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
6
338 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it (Two-Door
Models).
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be
removed if it interferes with the installation of
the child restraint.
For further information, see Ú page 40.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi-
tion with an ALR retractor.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
SAFETY 339
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 339 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. For
the location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle, see Ú page 330.
6
340 SAFETY
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models With Center
Armrest)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door
Without Center Armrest
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
head restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback
and head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models Without
Center Armrest)
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING! (Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY 341
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the center tether anchorage
located on the back of the seat.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on
until the fault is removed. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. See Ú page 305 for further
information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the pedal
assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedal assemblies or impair safe operation of
your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
6
342 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fas-
teners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals
and cause a loss of vehicle control. To pre-
vent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
SAFETY 343
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to pre-
vent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
6
344
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and an SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 446.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built-in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
1 — Assist Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can
help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Addi-
tional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to an SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the overhead console or
press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off
the green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will
turn green once a connection to an SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
an SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to an SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed an
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
7
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service
that can immediately connect you with help in
the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy.
Please refer to your provided radio supplement
for complete information.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-
ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly
onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a
clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
7
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into
PARK (P), or a manual transmission into
REVERSE (R).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear
cargo area. To remove jack and tools proceed
as follows:
1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
Load Floor
NOTE:
The load floor can be removed for easier access
by pulling the load floor directly rearward.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
(Continued)
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by
pinching the latch on the left side and
pulling upward.
Hardware Storage Cover Latch
3. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise
to loosen the jack from the storage bin.
Plastic Wing Nut Location
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier,
remove the tire cover, if equipped.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning
the lock bolt counterclockwise with the
#T40 torx head driver and ratchet from the
supplied tool kit.
Unlock Rear Camera Cover
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench
turning them counterclockwise. If equipped,
remove the locking lug nut with the lock key
(located in the glove box) turning it counter-
clockwise.
Removing The Spare Tire
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission to REVERSE.
7
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from
the stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Connect the jack handle driver to the
extension, then to the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of
the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle
tube, as shown. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to install the spare
tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts clockwise.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the counterclockwise, and remove the
jack.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 431. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
7
352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel
blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper
locations.
14. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the
spare tire carrier. Torque down lug nuts and
locking lug nut.
15. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on
the camera cover by turning the lock
clockwise using the provided #40 torx head
driver and ratchet. Then, reinstall the
camera cover by slipping it over the
camera/tire carrier until it snaps into place.
Lock Bolt Location
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
Supplemental Battery — If Equipped
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop, could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system volt-
age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the
battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical
system may occur.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 353
(Continued)
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right
rear of the engine compartment.
Positive (+) Battery Post Location
NOTE:
The positive (+) battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the post.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right
rear of the engine compartment.
Positive (+) Battery Post
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start
system, it will be equipped with two batteries
Ú page 163.
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P)
(manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective
cover over the remote positive (+) battery
post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Only use the positive battery post on the
main battery to jump start your vehicle.
Serious injury or death could result if you
attempt to jump start using the supple-
mental battery.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
7
354 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The
ground must be away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the nega-
tive (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the bat-
tery to explode and could result in personal
injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging ben-
efit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 355
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the
negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable from the remote
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
NOTE:
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at an authorized dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat-
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade bat-
tery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
off until the pointer drops back into the nor-
mal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
7
356 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases
where the transmission will not shift out of
PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a Manual
Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the manual park release cover,
located above the gear selector, to access
the release tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening
in the console base.
Tether Strap
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until
the release lever locks into place in the
vertical position. The vehicle is now out of
PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the
parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it
from the “locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever
downward and to the right, into its original
position.
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console, and reinstall the cover.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the Man-
ual Park Release. In addition, you should be
seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Acti-
vating the Manual Park Release on an unse-
cured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 357
(Continued)
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. For
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or
SECOND gear (2) and REVERSE (R) (with
manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R)
can only be achieved at wheel speeds of
5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
“Partial OFF” mode, before rocking the
vehicle Ú page 286. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the ESC OFF switch again to
restore “ESC On” mode.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as
described Ú page 199.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let any-
one near a spinning wheel, no matter what
the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
358 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged,
instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move
the vehicle Ú page 356.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in
PARK (P) (for automatic transmissions) or in
gear NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual
transmissions) Ú page 199.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
Manual Transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)
Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 359
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is
towed with the ignition in the OFF mode. The
only approved method of towing without the key
fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they
are mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle. Always use an appro-
priately rated tow strap.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 324.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 326.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to res-
cue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use
tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway
towing. You could damage your vehicle. Tow
straps are recommended when towing the
vehicle, chains may cause vehicle damage.
7
360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon
as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster
display, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed
and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
oil change is necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped
vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the
instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
Instrument Cluster Display for further
information Ú page 111.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check the engine oil level.
Check the windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage, rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering,
and fill as needed.
Check the function of all interior and exterior
lights.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
NOTE:
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease; reapply if necessary
8
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, rear suspension, and replace
if necessary
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc
brakes
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X
Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine
1
X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine
1
X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
Flush and replace the engine, intercooler (if equipped) coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first
X X
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or
more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C)
X X X X X
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the follow-
ing: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary X
Change front and rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing
X X X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
8
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, to reset the message
Ú page 111.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or
12 months, whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the
housing when the new filter is installed if the
residual oil is not either removed from the
housing or enough time has not elapsed to
allow the oil to drain back into the engine. When
servicing the oil filter on this engine, carefully
remove the filter and use a suction gun to
remove any residual oil left in the housing or
wait about 30 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the engine.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and affect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
MAINTENANCE PLAN — DIESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change fuel filter.
8
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if neces-
sary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer tow-
ing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter
assembly.
Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not
exceed 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE — B6 TO
B20 B
IODIESEL
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
six months, whichever comes first when
using biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
The owner is required to monitor mileage for
B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change
indicator system does not reflect the use of
biofuels.
Fuel filter change interval is maintained at
every second oil change. This is especially
important with biodiesel usage.
For more information on using biodiesel
Ú page 435.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,
000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Change transfer case fluid. X
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and affect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
8
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
3.6L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Pressure Cap— If Equipped
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 11 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer (if equipped) is
shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator
antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid
reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to
a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper
blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you.
Care must be exercised when filling or work-
ing around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 352.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
8
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L Engine (If
Equipped)
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommend engine oils that
are API SP/GF-6 certified and meet the
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
If the negative battery cables are not
isolated properly it can cause a potential
power spike or surge in the system,
resulting in damage to essential electrical
components.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pres-
sures generated by these machines is such
that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-13340. An equivalent full synthetic engine
oil can be used if it meets API SP/GF-6
Certification. If API SP/GF-6 or equivalent oil is
unavailable then please contact your local
dealership for recommendation.
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L Engine (If
Equipped)
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, FCA
recommends engine oils that meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-12991, and that are API SN certified and
meet the requirements of FCA LLC.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). FCA only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
FCA strongly recommends against the addition
of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality mopar filters should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty.
8
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 361 for gasoline engines or
Ú page 365 for diesel engines.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
mopar filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance
intervals as shown in the Maintenance
Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air
cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover
fasteners using a suitable tool.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction sys-
tem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure
to do so can result in serious personal injury.
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance
intervals as shown in the Maintenance
Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air
cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover
fasteners using a suitable tool.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
The fuel/water separator housing is located
inside the left frame rail in front of the fuel tank.
The best access to this water drain valve is from
under the vehicle.
If necessary remove the fuel filter protective
cover to access the water drain valve.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
8
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
If water is detected in the water separator while
the engine is running, or while the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the “Water In Fuel
Indicator Light” will illuminate and an audible
chime will be heard. At this point you should
stop the engine and drain the water from the
filter housing.
Within 10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the
filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the
filter housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/
water; allow the accumulated water to drain.
Leave the drain valve open until all water and
contaminants have been removed. When clear
fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning it
clockwise.
Upon proper draining of the water from fuel
filter assembly, the “Water In Fuel Indicator
Light” will remain illuminated for approximately
10 seconds. If the water was drained while the
engine was running, the “Water In Fuel Indicator
Light” may remain on for approximately three
minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or government agency for advice on
recycling programs and for where used fluids
and filters can be properly disposed of in your
area.
If more than two ounces or 60 ml of fuel have
been drained, follow the directions for Priming If
The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel Ú page 378.
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT — DIESEL
E
NGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manu-
facturer’s filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system
life and reliability. We recommend you use
Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating.
1 — Retainers
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Remove the fuel filter protective cover to
access the fuel filter assembly.
3. Place drain pan under the fuel filter
assembly.
4. Open the water drain valve, and let any
accumulated water and fuel drain.
5. Close the water drain valve.
Fuel Filter Assembly
6. Wipe clean the underside of the filter
housing to prevent contamination from
entering fuel system during service.
7. Remove the fuel filter cap and filter from the
housing using a socket. Rotate counter-
clockwise for removal.
8. Remove the used fuel filter cartridge from
the cap and dispose of according to your
local regulations.
9. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the cap
and housing.
10. Lubricate o-ring on the cap with clean
engine oil.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter
during this action. It is best to install the
filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
1 — Retainers
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
CAUTION! (Continued)
1 — Water Drain Valve
1 — Fuel Filter Cap
2 — Socket Adapter
CAUTION!
Take care when handling the new fuel filter to
prevent contamination from entering the fuel
system.
8
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
11. Install the new fuel filter cartridge onto the
cap.
12. Insert the cap and filter into the housing
with clockwise rotation, use a socket to
tighten.
13. After engine start, verify the fuel filter cap
does not leak.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the
tank, approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Push ignition switch twice without your foot
on brake to put vehicle in RUN position. This
will activate the in tank fuel pump for
approximately 30 seconds. Repeat this
process twice.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting
procedure Ú page 138.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
NOTE:
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to
separate water from the fuel, resulting in
high pressure fuel system corrosion or
damage.
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper opera-
tion of your diesel engine.
For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recom-
mended to assist with cold starting.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
This engine meets all required diesel engine
emissions standards. To achieve these
emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped
with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
system. These systems are seamlessly
integrated into your vehicle and managed by
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
manages engine combustion to allow the
exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input
or interaction on your part.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert
you to additional maintenance required on your
vehicle or engine.
Refer to Instrument Cluster Display for further
information Ú page 111.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel
spray can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The starter motor will engage for approxi-
mately 30 seconds at a time. Allow two min-
utes between cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and be hazardous or explo-
sive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gaso-
line, the use of these fuels can cause dam-
age to the fuel system.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
(Continued)
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known
simply by the name of its active component,
UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations.
DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with
engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx)
into harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
For further information Ú page 438.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt, from rib to rib, are considered normal.
These are not a reason to replace a belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords,
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive
belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. FCA recommends
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book,
located in your owner’s information kit, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Informa-
tion Book for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced repairman.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condi-
tioning system as the chemicals can damage
your air conditioning components. Such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel
stop and lower the door.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that
secure the air filter access door to the HVAC
housing.
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet
housing. Pull the filter elements out
pinching them to the right for clearance.
Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter
position indicators pointing in the same
direction as removal.
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure
retaining tabs.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in per-
sonal injury.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
8
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back
into position ensuring you have properly
engaged the travel damper.
Travel Dampener
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
Ú page 361 for gasoline engines or
Ú page 365 for diesel engines.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, push the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Open swing gate to access the wiper arm.
Rear Wiper Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
8
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate
wiper blade outward to disengage the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm
3. Gently set the arm on the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm and
rotate the wiper in to place.
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the
tail gate.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you Ú page 341.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check the engine, battery (if equipped),
intercooler (if equipped), and Motor Generator
Unit (MGU) (if equipped) coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
8
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if
equipped), and MGU (if equipped) coolant is
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should
be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine, battery (if equipped),
intercooler (if equipped), and MGU (if equipped)
cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
Ú page 361 for gasoline engines or
Ú page 365 for diesel engines.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 438.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust
products, as they may not be compatible with
the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
OAT or HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring
proper disposal. Check with your local
authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene
glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow
it to remain in puddles on the ground, clean up
any ground spills immediately. If ingested, seek
emergency assistance immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
8
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant freeze point or replacing
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant should be within the OK range
between the ADD and FULL range on the
dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from
the engine coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant
bottle without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the
coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant freeze point or replacing
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
(Continued)
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. For the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 361.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the brake system warning light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within
the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure
to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads
wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is
abnormally low, check the system for leaks
Ú page 442.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
Ú page 442. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
voir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
8
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch
(3 mm) below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and
supported by the axles.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the
level specified above.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only FCA recommended fluid Ú page 442.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of
the fill hole when the vehicle is in a level
position.
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 361.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only FCA recommended fluid Ú page 442.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug.
The fluid level should be between the bottom of
the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 of
an inch (4.76 mm) below the bottom of the
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid
becomes contaminated with water, it should be
changed immediately. Otherwise, change the
fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 361.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fill hole
2 — Drain hole
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only FCA recommended manual
transmission fluid Ú page 442.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
E
QUIPPED
Special Additives
FCA strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not
add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only FCA specified
transmission fluid Ú page 442. It is important
to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct
level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis-
sion as the chemicals can damage your trans-
mission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe trans-
mission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than FCA rec-
ommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque con-
verter shudder Ú page 442.
8
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended period of time with the
engine off, may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays.
The PDC top cover is labeled with each
serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and size.
Power Distribution Center Location
Power Distribution Center
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system,
gearbox system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 – – Spare
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare
F07 – 15 Amp Blue Low Temp Radiator Cooling Pump (LTR) — If Equipped
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare
F10 – 15 Amp Blue
Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub (RF HUB)/
Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty
Electrical Pkg (SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare
8
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER
F22 – 10 Amp Red
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module
(PCM)/Motor Generator Unit (MGU) WAKE UP/Power Pack
Unit (PPU) WAKE UP
F23 – 10 Amp Red
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module
(ECM)
F24 – – Spare
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL
MOD)/Steering Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant Classifica-
tion Module (OCM)/Driver Presence Detection Module
(DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red
ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module
(IRCM)/Airbag Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power
Steering (EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE
UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP — If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW MOD — If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W — If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
F39 – 15 Amp Blue MGU Coolant Pump (3.6) — If Equipped
F40 – 15 Amp Blue
DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC)
FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – 10 Amp Red
Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)/
Spare (Belt Starter Generator) -- If Equipped
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller ORC
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Digital TV (DSRC)/USB/InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/
Compass Module (CSGM)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – – Spare
F54 – – Spare
F55 – 10 Amp Red Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM)
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Driver Heated Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Pass Heated Seat
F59 – – Spare
F60 – 15 Amp Blue
Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR
WHEEL)
F61 – 10 Amp Red
Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor
(RBSS)
F62 – – Spare
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR Front
F67 – – Spare
F68 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
F69 – 5 Amp Tan
Motor Generator Unit MGU Belt Starter Generator (BSG) —
If Equipped
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG — If Equipped
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT
F75 – 10 Amp Red
Power Pack Unit - Battery Pack Control Module & Auxiliary
Power Module (PPU-BPCM & APM) Belt Starter Generator
(BSG) — If Equipped
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red HEATED MIRRORS
F78 – 10 Amp Red COMP/INTRUSION/SIREN/INTRUSION SENSORS
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
F81 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR — If Equipped
F83 60 Amp Yellow – GLOW PLUG — If Equipped
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT — If Equipped
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR — If Equipped
F86 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP 2 — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP — If Equipped
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/ #2 — IF Equipped
F89 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/ Cruise Control
(CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV (DTV)
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP — If Equipped
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2 — If Equipped
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1 — If Equipped
F94 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)/RF Hub system (CORAX)
F95 – – Spare
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 — If Equipped
F104 – 15 Amp Blue PPU COOL PUMP — If Equipped
F105 – 10 Amp Red
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air Condi-
tioning (HVAC)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed when the ignition in ON.
F106 50 Amp Red – Cruise Control -PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT — If Equipped
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 — If Equipped
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT — If Equipped
F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
8
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/
Wipe)
**
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7444NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NALL/WY21WLL
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443LL
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Halogen Headlamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers
along the top a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at
one side and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the
headlamp to the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grab the bulb and rotate a quarter turn
counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
License Lamp LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer
or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
8
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock
position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and
push the connector locking tab to the lock
position.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a
quarter turn clockwise.
Front Park/Turn Signal
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
access bulb sockets.
Wheel Liner
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove from
housing. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket to replace.
LED Front Side Marker
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
access side maker screw and electrical
connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the
front side maker assembly and disconnect
electrical connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker
light assembly.
Halogen Front Fog Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the
back of the front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector
from the front fog lamp connector
receptacle.
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch
features and squeeze them together to
unlock the bulb from the back of the front
fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
opening in the housing and then connect
the replacement bulb.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps
they are replaced as an a ssembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access
single retaining screw for tail lamp
assembly.
Trim Cap
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect
electrical connector, then remove tail lamp
assembly from the vehicle.
NOTE:
If necessary, push in on the assembly tab
located inboard behind the lamp housing.
Retaining Screw
3. Remove the three screws from assembly
bracket to access bulb sockets.
Assembly Bracket
4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter
turn counterclockwise, then remove it from
the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
replace.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that
extends upward from the swing gate behind the
spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the LED
Assembly from an authorized dealer.
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier
cover.
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly
and disconnect electrical connector.
8
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
License Plate Lamps
See an authorized dealer to replace LED lamps.
NOTE:
To install a new bulb, reverse the procedure
above. When installing the new bulb, care
should be taken to not allow bare skin to come
in contact with the bulb.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
8
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
Tire Terminology And Definitions
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a mini-
mum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard Ú page 192.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 192.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
8
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over-
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping dis-
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
8
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
FCA advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire
inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may
be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac-
ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 357.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
For further information Ú page 414.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
8
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. FCA strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to
the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this
section. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The
Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will
be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 405.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a differ-
ent size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi-
tions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting
in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss
of vehicle control.
8
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 197.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use tem-
porary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tem-
porary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the lim-
ited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi-
tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
8
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these spe-
cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Sport Rear 245/75R17 S Class or Autosock
Willy’s Rear LT255/75R17C Autosock
Sahara Rear 255/70R18 Autosock
Rubicon Rear LT285/70R17C Autosock
High Altitude Rear 275/55R20 Autosock
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 361. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and cir-
cumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the transfer
case. Tire rotation schedule should be fol-
lowed to balance tire wear.
8
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
3 weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start
system then disconnect both the main and
supplemental negative battery cables.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
If assistance is needed to disconnect the
battery system, see an authorized dealer.
Battery Cable Disconnect
NOTE:
You must isolate the supplemental battery
connection point, as well as the main battery
terminal from the post, as shown in the
image, to fully de-energize both batteries for
storage. If assistance is needed to discon-
nect the battery system, see an authorized
dealer.
Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS), or your Stop/Start system may
not function for up to 24 hours, due to the IBS
being set into learn mode.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated
properly it can cause a potential power spike
or surge in the system, resulting in damage to
essential electrical components.
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
4 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
8
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's
interior trim and top, follow these precautions:
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic
car wash. Window scratches and wax
build-up may result.
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with
the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may
damage interior trim.
Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching
agents on top material, as damage may
result.
Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down
and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top,
always make sure it is completely dry before
lowering.
Be especially careful when washing the
windows by following the directions for “Care
of Fabric Top Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent,
or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush
with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required,
use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the
entire top, but support the top from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of
cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean
water. Remember to allow the top to dry before
lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains, or mildew of
the top material:
Do not run a fabric top through an auto-
matic car wash. Window scratches and wax
build-up may result.
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle’s interior.
Use care when washing the vehicle, water
pressure directed at the weather strip seals
may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
Careless handling and storage of the
removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
8
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic
windows which can be scratched unless special
care is taken by following these directions:
Never use a dry cloth to remove dust.
Instead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton
cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean
water, and wipe across the window, not up
and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window
Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
plastic windows without scratching. It
removes fine scratches to improve visibility
and provides UV protection to help prevent
yellowing.
When washing, never use hot water or
anything stronger than a mild soap. Never
use solvents such as alcohol or harsh
cleaning agents.
Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then
wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean
cloth.
When removing frost, snow or ice, never use
a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm
water only if you must clean the window
quickly.
Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from
off-road driving will have an impact on plastic
retainer operation. Even normal on-road
driving and vehicle washing will eventually
impact window plastic retainer operation. To
maintain ease of use of the window plastic
retainers, each window plastic retainer
should be cleaned and lubricated regularly.
Clean them with a mild soap solution and a
small brush. Cleaning products are available
through an authorized dealer.
Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any
tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to
remove and may damage the windows.
INTERIORS
CARPET SAFETY INFORMATION
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use carpet that does not interfere with the
operation of the pedal assemblies. Only operate
the vehicle when the carpet is securely
attached by the grommets so it cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedal
assemblies or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
CAUTION!
Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes
in washing stations. Wash the vehicle only
by hand using neutral pH detergents; dry it
with a wet chamois leather. Abrasive prod-
ucts and/or polishes should not be used for
cleaning the car. Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly aggres-
sive.
Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle
under trees; remove vegetable resins
immediately as, when dried, it may only be
possible to remove them with abrasive
products and/or polishes, which is highly
inadvisable as they could alter the typical
opaqueness of the paint.
Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for
cleaning the front windshield and rear
window; dilute it min. 50% with water. Only
use pure windshield washer fluid when
strictly necessary due to outside tempera-
ture conditions.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
(Continued)
CARPET REMOVAL
Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):
1. Remove the front grommets.
Front Carpet
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
Front Carpet Pulled Away
WARNING!
If operating the vehicle without carpet in
place the floor may become hot, and there
is a risk of burns.
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or damaged grommets may cause your
carpet to interfere with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of
vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH: ALWAYS securely attach your
carpet using the grommets.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the carpet
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the carpet and
may cause interference with the acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals.
ONLY install carpet designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install carpet that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If the carpet needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved carpet for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check that the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Grommets
8
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat.
First for the rear carpet and then the front
carpet.
Front And Rear Carpet Split
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the
carpet split and then pull out the rear edge
and slide the carpet to the front (do not
remove the harness).
Rear Underside Of Front Seat
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat
bracket and then remove the last two
grommets.
Front Seat And Floor
6. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
1 — Harness
2 — Carpet Split
1 — Grommets
2 — Carpet Split
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
Rear Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat
(one left and one right).
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and
open the carpet split around the front seats
brackets.
Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle
3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right). First the grommet
for the cargo carpet and then the rear
carpet.
4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the
carpet split around the rear seats brackets.
Under Rear Seat
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the rear seats.
2. Remove the sides grommets (one left and
one right). First the grommet from the side
carpet and then the rear carpet.
Side Carpet
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat
(one left and one right).
1 — Carpet Split
1 — Carpet Split
1 — Grommet
8
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and
open the carpet split around the front seats
brackets.
Pull Carpet To The Rear
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the
carpet split around the seat belt
attachment.
Under Rear Seat
3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and
the side support and then pull the carpet out.
Rear Load Floor
4. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap
Hider:
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the
carpet split around the seat belt attachment
and under the center seat bracket.
Under Rear Seat
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
1 — Side Supports
2 — Load Floor
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Grommets
3 — Rear Carpet
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Side Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet (one left and
one right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top
flange, then all around the perimeter and
open the carpet split around the seat belt
attachment.
Inside Sidewall
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Side Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet and then the
lower one (left and right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top
flange, then all around the perimeter and
open the carpet split around the seat belt
attachment.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
1 — Top Flange
2 — Grommet
3 — Side Carpet
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur-
poses. Many are potentially flammable, and if
used in closed areas they may cause respira-
tory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not disas-
semble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retrac-
tor, torn webbing, etc).
8
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather upholstery and should be
removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid.
Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia- based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the uphol-
stery may result.
431
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the A-pillar, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Spare Tire Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
59 Ft-Lbs
(80 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
9
432 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier
located on the swing gate.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than
recommended octane can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emission requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance, when using high-quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
“premium” gasoline will allow these engines to
operate to optimal performance. This increase
in performance is most noticeable in hot
weather or other heavier load conditions, such
as while towing.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 433
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of FCA and may void or not be
covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing metha-
nol, or gasoline containing more than 15%
ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indi-
cator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly communi-
cate if a fuel contains greater than 15% etha-
nol (E-15).
9
434 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of FCA and
may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. FCA
recommends that gasoline without MMT be
used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel
fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to
the emissions control system.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM
(formerly known as the American Society for
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehi-
cle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of FCA and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 435
Testing and Materials) specification D-975
Grade S15 will provide good performance. If the
vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F
or -7°C), or is required to operate at
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged
periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or
dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel
fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel
gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water.
To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
accumulated water from the fuel/water
separator using the fuel/water separator drain
provided on the fuel filter housing. If you buy
good quality fuel and follow the cold weather
advice above, fuel conditioners should not be
required in your vehicle. If available in your
area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel may
offer improved cold-starting and warm-up
performance.
DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
This diesel engine has been developed to take
advantage of the high energy content and
generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized
diesel fuels.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gaso-
line on your diesel vehicle, do not start the
engine. Damage to the engine and fuel
system could occur. Please call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your diesel engine without any adjustments
to regular service schedules.
Commercially available fuel additives are not
necessary for the proper operation of your
diesel engine.
No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only
be used where extended arctic conditions
(-10°F or -23°C) exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D975 is recommended for
use with your diesel engine. If frequent
operation with Biodiesel blends that are
between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) is desired, the
maintenance schedule is subject to shorter
intervals.
The oil and filter change along with fuel filter
replacement is subject to shorter intervals
when operating your engine on biodiesel
greater than 5%. Do not use biodiesel greater
than 20%.
For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6%
and 20% (B6–B20) it is important that you
understand and comply with these
requirements Ú page 365.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and hazardous or explo-
sive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START engine before you drain
the water from the fuel filter(s) to avoid
engine damage Ú page 375.
9
436 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
resources typically derived from animal fat,
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME)
base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or
SOME) base).
Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which
require that you understand and adhere to the
following requirements if you use blends of
Biodiesel between 6% and 20% (B6–B20).
There are no unique restrictions for the use of
B5.
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for
both storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such
as storing the fuel in a heated building or a
heated storage tank, or using cold temperature
additives.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM
Standards
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely.
Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the
following specifications may be blended to
meet Biodiesel blend B6 – B20 fuel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-975 and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting
ASTM specification D-6751
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
produced to approved ASTM standards, if
stored properly, provides for protection against
fuel oxidation for up to six months.
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Mopar
Approved Fuel Filter Elements
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar
filtration system is designed to provide
adequate fuel water separation capabilities.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been
observed with the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in
oil must not exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is
met your oil change interval must be
maintained with in the suggested schedule. The
CAUTION!
Failure to comply with Oil Change require-
ments for vehicles operating on biodiesel
blends between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) will
result in premature engine wear. Such wear is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
CAUTION!
Use of blends greater than 20% is not
approved. Use of blends greater than 20%
can result in engine damage. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
CAUTION!
In the event that the vehicle is filled with bio-
diesel and not used for more than a month,
the fuel should either be used up by driving
(up to quarter tank) and filled with standard
diesel blends with less than 5% that is nor-
mally available. This will help prevent the fuel
filter clogging and potential damage to the
fuel injection system due to degraded bio-
diesel, which is not covered by the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 437
regular use of biodiesel between 6% and 20%
requires intervals shorter than the outlined
10,000 miles (16,000 km)and must not exceed
the suggested schedule. When routinely
operating on biodiesel between 6% and 20%, oil
and filter replacement intervals must not
exceed 8,000 Miles (12,875 km) or six months,
which ever comes first.
Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel
filter change intervals. When operating on
biodiesel between 6% and 20%, fuel filter
replacement intervals should be every second
oil change, and must not exceed 16,000 miles
(25,750 km).
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
6 months, if regular operation occurs with 6% -
20% biodiesel blends. Under no circumstances
should fuel filter replacement intervals exceed
every second oil change and must not exceed
16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation
occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure
to comply with these Oil Change and fuel filter
requirements for vehicles operating on
biodiesel blends up to B20 may result in prema-
ture engine wear. Such wear is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The engine
may suffer severe damage if operated with
concentrations of biodiesel higher than 20%.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models 17.5 Gallons 66 Liters
Four Door Models 21.5 Gallons 81 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 18.3 Gallons 69 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.1 Gallons 19.3 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 9 Quarts 8.5 Liters
9
438 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine 10.3 Quarts 9.7 Liters
2.0L Engine Intercooler 3.2 Quarts 3.0 Liters
3.6L Engine 11.2 Quarts 10.6 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) 1.9 Quarts 1.8 Liters
3.6L Battery Coolant 2.5 Quarts 2.4 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Intercooler
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
US Metric
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 439
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine
We recommend you use Mopar API SP/GF-6 Certified SAE 5W-30 Full
Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-30 engine oil can be
used if it meets API SP/GF-6 Certification. If API SP/GF-6 or equivalent oil
is unavailable then please contact a local dealership for recommenda-
tion.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6 or equivalent oil can cause
engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Penn-
zoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil
Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
9
440 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 441
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.0L Diesel Engine
We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar that
meets FCA Material Standard MS-12991 and the API SN engine oil cate-
gory is required.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil
Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Diesel Engine
We recommend you use Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating.
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the FCA filtration and water separat-
ing requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Diesel Engine
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle.
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of
Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid dam-
age to the emissions control system. For most year-round service, Num-
ber 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will
provide good performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5%
biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975 with your diesel engine.
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no
greater than 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided
the shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid — 3.0L Diesel Engine
Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has
been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certi-
fied to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.
9
442 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or per-
formance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Differential
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API
GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M200 Sales Code DRZ)
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140) (API
GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API
GL-5). Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a
friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
443
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US
LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
10
444 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc-
tive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects, or other reproductive
harm.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 445
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and
maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
10
446 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
447
INDEX
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal ............. 87
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
Position ........................................................... 69
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
............................................................243
Raising The Soft Top ................................. 80
Removing The Soft Top ............................. 83
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
......................... 45
WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................445
A
About Your Brakes.........................................431
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)................................................ 168, 170
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............386
Adding Fuel.......................................... 187, 188
Additives, Fuel ...............................................433
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................250
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
......................................315
Air Bag Warning Light...................... 313, 316
Enhanced Accident Response......... 324, 359
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................359
Front Air Bag ................................... 314, 316
If Deployment Occurs ................................324
Knee Impact Bolsters................................322
Maintaining Your Air Bag System.............. 325
Maintenance ............................................ 325
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light............. 313
Transporting Pets ..................................... 341
Air Bag Light................................122, 313, 341
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter)
............................................................ 374
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 380
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 380
Air Conditioner System ................................. 380
Air Conditioning Filter..............................60, 381
Air Conditioning System ...................................59
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................60
Air Filter ........................................................ 374
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 411
Alarm
Arm The System
..........................................24
Disarm The System .....................................25
Security Alarm ....................................24, 125
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
.........................................................11
Android Auto ........................................ 252, 254
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 386, 437
Disposal ................................................... 387
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 284
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 125
Apple CarPlay ....................................... 252, 256
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 290
Audio Settings............................................... 236
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 210
Auto Down Power Windows..............................68
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................44
Automatic Door Locks ......................................29
Automatic Headlights.......................................50
Automatic High Beams.....................................50
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............59
Automatic Transmission................................ 149
Adding Fluid.............................................. 391
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 391
Fluid Change............................................. 391
Fluid Level Check...................................... 391
Fluid Type ........................................ 391, 442
Gear Ranges............................................. 150
Special Additives ...................................... 391
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 153
AutoPark ....................................................... 135
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........64
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................64
Auxiliary Switches ............................................66
Axle Fluid....................................................... 442
Axle Lock.............................................. 159, 160
11
448
B
Battery
................................................. 123, 371
Charging System Light...............................123
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 17
Belts, Seat .....................................................341
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................293
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................245
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................382
B-Pillar Location.............................................408
Brake Assist System ......................................285
Brake Control System ....................................285
Brake Fluid .......................................... 389, 442
Brake System ...................................... 389, 431
Anti-Lock (ABS)..........................................431
Fluid Check ...............................................389
Master Cylinder .........................................389
Parking......................................................144
Warning Light ............................................122
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................149
Bulb Replacement ............................... 400, 401
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 343, 400
Bumper End Cap Removal.............................202
C
Camera, Rear
................................................184
Capacities, Fluid ............................................437
Caps, Filler
Fuel .......................................................... 187
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 368
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 387
Car Washes................................................... 422
Carbon Monoxide Warning............................ 343
Cargo Area Cover .......................................... 105
Cargo Load Floor........................................... 105
Cargo Tie-Downs ........................................... 105
Carpeting ...................................................... 425
CD................................................................. 238
Cellular Phone .............................................. 281
Center High Mounted Stop Light................... 403
Certification Label......................................... 192
Chains, Tire................................................... 418
Chart, Tire Sizing........................................... 405
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)
............................................................. 132
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 341
Checks, Safety .............................................. 341
Child Restraint .............................................. 326
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
........................................... 329
Child Seat Installation .............................. 338
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 335
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 328
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 333
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.. 330
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 328
Seating Positions...................................... 330
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 433
Cleaning
Wheels
...................................................... 417
Climate Control
Automatic
....................................................54
Manual ........................................................57
Cold Weather Operation................................ 137
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 416
Connected Services ...................................... 257
Connected Services FAQ ............................... 275
Connected Services Features ....................... 261
Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 259
Connected Services, Introduction ................. 257
Connector
UCI
...............................................................62
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).............62
Console............................................................62
Floor ............................................................62
Contract, Service........................................... 444
Controls ........................................................ 229
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 387
Cooling System ............................................. 385
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 386
Coolant Level............................................ 388
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 437
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 387
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 386
Inspection........................................385, 388
Points To Remember ................................ 388
Pressure Cap ............................................ 387
449
Radiator Cap
.............................................387
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
........................ 386, 437, 438
Corrosion Protection ......................................422
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............ 168, 170
Cruise Light ................................ 130, 131, 132
Customer Assistance .....................................443
Customer Programmable Features................211
Cybersecurity .................................................210
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 49
Dealer Service ...............................................372
Defroster, Windshield ....................................341
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers.............................. 52
Deleting A Phone ...........................................245
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................132
Diesel
Display Messages .....................................118
Diesel Fuel.....................................................434
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................434
Bulk Storage Of .........................................189
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................378
Dimmer Switch
Headlight
..................................................... 50
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)
................................................371
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................357
Disc Drive ......................................................238
Disconnecting................................................245
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 387
Disturb.......................................................... 249
Door Ajar.............................................. 123, 124
Door Ajar Light ..................................... 123, 124
Door Frame......................................................97
Installation ..................................................97
Removal ......................................................97
Door Locks
Automatic
....................................................29
Doors ...............................................................25
Removal ...............................................30, 32
Removal, Front ............................................30
Removal, Rear.............................................32
Drag & Drop.................................................. 227
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter............ 375
Driver Memory Presets ................................. 235
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt...............................34, 35
Driving .......................................................... 201
E
Electric Brake Control System
....................... 285
Anti-Lock Brake System............................ 284
Electronic Roll Mitigation................. 285, 293
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................45
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........64
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................64
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 286
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 123
Emergency
In Case Of ................................................. 344
SOS Emergency Call ................................. 344
Emergency Brake.......................................... 144
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking
...................................................... 348
Jump Starting ........................................... 352
Tow Hooks ................................................ 359
Emission Control System Maintenance......... 132
Engine........................................................... 368
Air Cleaner ................................................ 374
Block Heater.................................... 138, 143
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 143
Checking Oil Level .................................... 371
Compartment .........................368, 369, 370
Compartment Identification....368, 369, 370
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 438
Cooling...................................................... 385
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 343
Fails To Start............................................. 137
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 137
Fuel Requirements ..........................432, 437
Idling......................................................... 141
Jump Starting ........................................... 352
Oil ...........................................372, 437, 438
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 368
Oil Filter .................................................... 373
Oil Reset ................................................... 113
Oil Selection............................372, 373, 437
Oil Synthetic.............................................. 373
11
450
Overheating
...............................................355
Starting .....................................................134
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature................................................ 324, 359
Ethanol ..........................................................433
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................................343
Exhaust Gas Cautions....................................343
Exhaust System ................................... 343, 384
Exterior Lights.........................................49, 343
F
Fabric Care
....................................................423
Fabric Top......................................................423
Family Alerts ..................................................274
Filters
Air Cleaner.................................................374
Air Conditioning ..................................60, 381
Engine Fuel ...............................................375
Engine Oil ........................................ 373, 438
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................373
Flashers
Hazard Warning
.........................................344
Turn Signal ................................................343
Turn Signals ........................... 131, 402, 403
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 50
Flat Tire Changing................................ 404, 415
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 404, 415
Flooded Engine Starting ................................137
Fluid Capacities .............................................437
Fluid Leaks ....................................................343
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission ............................... 390
Fluid Level Checks........................................ 390
Brake........................................................ 389
Engine Oil ................................................. 371
Fluid, Brake .................................................. 442
Fog Lights ..................................................... 402
Fog Lights, Service........................................ 402
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat .............................37
Fold-Flat Seats.................................................34
Folding Rear Seats...........................................36
Folding Windshield ....................................... 100
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 297
Four Wheel Drive .......................................... 154
Operation ................................................. 154
Shifting ..................................................... 154
System ..................................................... 154
Four Wheel Drive Operation.......................... 157
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.............................. 344
Freedom Panels...............................................90
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 357
Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 390
Fuel...................................................... 432, 434
Adding ............................................. 187, 188
Additives................................................... 433
Clean Air ................................................... 433
Ethanol ..................................................... 433
Filler Cap (Gas Cap).................................. 187
Filter ......................................................... 375
Gasoline ................................................... 432
Materials Added ....................................... 433
Methanol .................................................. 433
Octane Rating.................................. 432, 438
Requirements .................................. 434, 437
Specifications .................................. 435, 438
Tank Capacity ........................................... 437
Fueling ................................................. 187, 188
Fuses ............................................................ 392
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.....................45
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)...................... 187, 188
Gasoline, (Fuel)............................................. 432
Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 433
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 433
Gauges
Voltage
...................................................... 139
Gear Ranges ........................................146, 150
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 430
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 193
GVWR............................................................ 192
H
Hard Top ..........................................................68
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal ..............87
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 344
Head Restraints ...............................................40
Headlights
Automatic ....................................................50
Bulb Replacement .................................... 401
451
Cleaning
....................................................422
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .......... 50
Lights On Reminder..................................... 50
Passing........................................................ 50
Replacing ..................................................401
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 45
Heated Seats................................................... 38
Heated Steering Wheel.................................... 34
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch
.............................................................. 50
Hill Descent Control.......................................288
Hill Descent Control Indicator ........................288
Hill Start Assist ..............................................290
Hitches
Trailer Towing
............................................195
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 45
Hood Prop......................................................104
Hood Release ................................................104
I
Ignition ............................................................ 19
Switch ......................................................... 19
In Case Of Emergency ...................................344
Inside Rearview Mirror..................................... 44
Instrument Cluster.........................................107
Descriptions ..............................................131
Display ......................................................111
Engine Oil Reset........................................113
Menu Items ...............................................113
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................... 430
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ................. 392
Interior And Instrument Lights .........................51
Interior Appearance Care.............................. 424
Interior Lights...................................................51
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................52
Intervention Regeneration Strategy .............. 378
Inverter
Power ..........................................................65
J
Jack Location
................................................ 348
Jack Operation.............................................. 349
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 349
Jump Starting ............................................... 352
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
..........................................24
Disarm The System .....................................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............18
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................17
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry)
...............................................................18
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..........................................26
Passive Entry ...............................................26
Keys.................................................................16
Replacement ...............................................18
L
Lane Change Assist..........................................51
Lap/Shoulder Belts....................................... 307
Latches ......................................................... 343
Hood ......................................................... 104
Leaks, Fluid................................................... 343
Life Of Tires................................................... 413
Light Bulbs ........................................... 343, 400
Lights ............................................................ 343
Air Bag ....................................122, 313, 341
Automatic Headlights ..................................50
Brake Assist Warning................................ 288
Brake Warning.......................................... 122
Bulb Replacement ........................... 400, 401
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 403
Cruise .....................................130, 131, 132
Daytime Running .........................................49
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................50
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator
............................................... 124
Exterior .............................................. 49, 343
Fog............................................................ 402
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 344
Headlights ................................................ 401
High Beam...................................................50
High Beam/Low Beam Select......................50
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 288
Interior.........................................................51
Lights On Reminder .....................................50
11
452
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)
.......126
Park...........................................................130
Passing........................................................ 50
Rear Servicing ...........................................403
Rear Tail Lamps ........................................403
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................123
Security Alarm ...........................................125
Service ............................................ 400, 401
Side Marker...............................................403
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS)...............300
Traction Control.........................................288
Turn Signal ................................................343
Turn Signals ........................... 131, 402, 403
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
................................ 124, 131
Load Floor, Cargo ..........................................105
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................117
Load Shed Battery Saver On..........................117
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............117
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............117
Loading Vehicle .............................................192
Tires ..........................................................408
Locking
Axle ................................................. 159, 160
Locks
Automatic Door
........................................... 29
Child Protection........................................... 29
Power Door.................................................. 26
Low Tire Pressure System .............................300
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
Position .....................................................69
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 382
Lug Nuts/Bolts.............................................. 431
Luggage Carrier ............................................ 105
M
Maintenance
....................................................94
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 371
Maintenance Schedule........................ 360, 364
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine)
................................................ 126, 133
Manual
Park Release ............................................ 356
Service ..................................................... 445
Manual Transmission .......................... 145, 390
Fluid Level Check ..................................... 390
Lubricant Selection ......................... 391, 442
Shift Speeds ............................................. 146
Media Mode.................................................. 238
Methanol ...................................................... 433
Mirrors .............................................................44
Automatic Dimming .....................................44
Electric Powered..........................................45
Electric Remote ...........................................45
Heated.........................................................45
Outside........................................................45
Rearview......................................................44
Vanity ..........................................................44
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.........................................................11
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 300
Mopar Parts .................................................. 445
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
................ 143, 144
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 305
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)............. 432, 438
Off Road Pages ............................................. 281
Accessory Gauges..................................... 283
Drivetrain.................................................. 282
Pitch And Roll ........................................... 283
Status Bar................................................. 282
Oil Filter, Change........................................... 373
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 373
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 124
Oil Reset ....................................................... 113
Oil, Engine............................................372, 438
Capacity.................................................... 437
Checking................................................... 371
Dipstick..................................................... 371
Disposal.................................................... 373
Filter ................................................ 373, 438
Filter Disposal........................................... 373
Identification Logo .................................... 373
Materials Added To................................... 373
Pressure Warning Light............................. 124
453
Recommendation
................... 372, 373, 437
Synthetic ...................................................373
Viscosity ....................................................437
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................132
Operating Precautions ...................................132
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................445
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 45
Overheating, Engine ......................................355
P
Paddle Shifters
..............................................153
Paint Care......................................................422
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
.....................................................243
Parking Brake ................................................144
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................179
Passive Entry ................................................... 26
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................227
Pets ...............................................................341
Phone Mode ..................................................241
Placard, Tire And Loading Information...........408
Power
Brakes
.......................................................431
Door Locks .................................................. 26
Inverter........................................................ 65
Mirrors......................................................... 45
Steering.....................................................163
Windows...................................................... 67
Power Sliding Top ............................................ 94
Operation ....................................................94
Pinch Protect ...............................................94
Quarter Window Removal............................96
Power Steering Fluid..................................... 442
Power Top Quarter Windows............................96
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................. 310
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 348
Presets ......................................................... 235
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
................................................. 310
R
Radial Ply Tires
............................................. 412
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........... 387
Radio
Presets ..................................................... 235
Radio Controls .............................................. 229
Radio Mode .................................................. 229
Radio Operation................................... 229, 281
Radio Remote Controls................................. 228
Raising The Soft Top .................................80
Rear Axle (Differential).................................. 390
Rear Camera................................................. 184
Rear Cross Path............................................ 296
Rear ParkSense System ............................... 179
Rear Swing Gate ........................................... 104
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................53
Recreational Towing ..................................... 199
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N)..... 200
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)............................................ 201
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 433
Refrigerant.................................................... 380
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 258
Release, Hood............................................... 104
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 306
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................................20
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ... 265, 276
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 266
Remote Features, Starting ................... 265, 277
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm .............................................24
Disarm The Alarm ........................................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............18
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 228
Remote Start (Diesel).......................................23
Remote Start (Gas) ..........................................20
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode
...............................22
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features
..................................................22
Uconnect Settings .......................................22
Remote Starting System ...........................20, 23
Removable Doors......................................30, 32
Front ............................................................30
Rear.............................................................32
Removable Top ................................................94
Removing The Soft Top .............................83
11
454
Replacement Bulbs
.......................................400
Replacement Keys........................................... 18
Replacement Tires.........................................414
Reporting Safety Defects...............................445
Restraints, Child ............................................326
Restraints, Head.............................................. 40
Roadside Assistance ........................... 266, 276
Roll Over Warning ............................................ 10
Roof Type Carrier ...........................................105
Rotation, Tires ...............................................419
S
Safety
............................................................227
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.........................341
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................342
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................445
Safety Features .............................................227
Safety Information, Tire .................................404
Safety Tips.....................................................341
Safety, Exhaust Gas.......................................343
Satellite Radio ...............................................231
Saved Radio Stations ....................................235
Schedule, Maintenance....................... 360, 364
Seat Belt Reminder .......................................123
Seat Belts ............................................ 305, 341
Adjustable Shoulder Belt...........................309
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage......309
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
.............................................309
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)............311
Child Restraints ........................................ 326
Energy Management Feature ................... 311
Extender ................................................... 310
Front Seat............................... 305, 307, 308
Inspection................................................. 341
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 308
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 309
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 307
Operating Instructions .............................. 308
Pregnant Women...................................... 310
Pretensioners ........................................... 310
Rear Seat ................................................. 307
Reminder.................................................. 306
Seat Belt Extender.................................... 310
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 310
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 309
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 429
Seats ...............................................................34
Adjustment ..................................................34
Fold And Tumble Rear .................................37
Heated.........................................................38
Height Adjustment.......................................35
Rear Folding ................................................34
Tilting...........................................................34
Security Alarm.........................................24, 125
Arm The System ..........................................24
Disarm The System .....................................25
Selec - Speed Control ................................... 291
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 438
Send & Go ........................................... 267, 276
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................18
Sentry Key Replacement..................................18
Service Assistance ........................................ 443
Service Contract............................................ 444
Service Manuals ........................................... 445
Settings, Audio.............................................. 236
Shifting.......................................................... 148
Automatic Transmission .................. 148, 149
Manual Transmission ............................... 145
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
................................... 200
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
................................... 201
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 307
Side Step Removal........................................ 202
Signals, Turn ..................... 131, 343, 402, 403
Sirius Satellite Radio..................................... 231
Favorites................................................... 233
Replay....................................................... 232
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
.......................................... 234
Favorites................................................... 233
Replay....................................................... 232
Smart Watch ................................................. 274
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 418
Snow Tires .................................................... 415
Soft Top.....................................................68, 77
Soft Top Windows ............................................77
SOS Call ............................................... 261, 275
Spare Tires..................................349, 415, 416
455
Spark Plugs
...................................................438
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)
..........................................438
Oil..............................................................438
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
...............................................170
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................174
Cancel .......................................................170
Resume.....................................................170
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................170
Starting................................................ 134, 137
Automatic Transmission.................. 134, 138
Button ......................................................... 19
Cold Weather ............................................137
Engine Block Heater........................ 138, 143
Engine Fails To Start .................................137
Manual Transmission................................134
Remote ....................................................... 20
Starting And Operating ..................................134
Starting Procedures............................. 134, 137
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ............137
Steering ........................................................... 33
Power ........................................................163
Tilt Column .................................................. 33
Wheel, Heated............................................. 34
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 33
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................228
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System .......228
Stolen Vehicle Assistance.................... 271, 277
Stop/Start............................................ 163, 166
Storage .............................................. 62, 77, 96
Behind the Seat...........................................62
Storage, Vehicle............................................ 421
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 235
Storing Your Vehicle...................................... 421
Stuck, Freeing............................................... 357
Sun Roof..........................................................94
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic ................................................. 161
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 293
Swing Gate, Rear .......................................... 104
Synthetic Engine Oil...................................... 373
System, Remote Starting .................................20
T
Telescoping Steering Column ..........................33
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............59
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................................. 105
Tilt Steering Column ........................................33
Tire And Loading Information Placard........... 408
Tire Markings ................................................ 404
Tire Safety Information ................................. 404
Tires......................... 342, 410, 415, 416, 420
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 413
Air Pressure .............................................. 410
Chains ...................................................... 418
Changing .................................................. 348
Compact Spare......................................... 416
General Information ...............410, 415, 416
High Speed............................................... 412
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 411
Life Of Tires .............................................. 413
Load Capacity ........................................... 408
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
.........................................127, 300
Quality Grading ......................................... 420
Radial ....................................................... 412
Replacement ............................................ 414
Rotation.................................................... 419
Safety .............................................. 404, 410
Sizes ......................................................... 405
Snow Tires ................................................ 415
Spare Tires .............................349, 415, 416
Spinning ................................................... 413
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 413
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 431
To Open Hood ............................................... 104
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 196
Top
Dual
.............................................................68
Hard.............................................................68
Power Sliding ...............................................94
Removable ..................................................68
Soft..............................................................68
Tow Hooks
Emergency
................................................ 359
Towing.........................................193, 195, 357
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 357
Recreational ............................................. 199
Weight ...................................................... 195
11
456
Towing Behind A Motorhome
.........................199
Trac-Lok
Rear Axle
...................................................159
Traction Control .............................................293
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................293
Trailer Towing ................................................193
Hitches......................................................195
Minimum Requirements............................196
Trailer And Tongue Weight .............. 195, 196
Wiring........................................................198
Trailer Towing Guide ......................................195
Trailer Weight ................................................195
Transfer Case ................................................390
Fluid ..........................................................442
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ............ 154, 157
Maintenance .............................................390
Transmission .................................................149
Automatic........................................ 149, 391
Fluid ..........................................................442
Maintenance .............................................391
Manual......................................................145
Shifting......................................................148
Transporting Pets ..........................................341
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................413
Turn Signals................................ 131, 402, 403
U
UCI Connector.................................................. 62
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
..................................247
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone................................................... 250
Uconnect Settings .......................................22
Uconnect App ............................................... 259
Uconnect Phone .................................. 243, 245
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................... 249
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress................ 248
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 252
Call Continuation ...................................... 250
Call Controls ............................................. 247
Call Termination ....................................... 250
Cancel Command ..................................... 243
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
............... 245
Help Command......................................... 243
Join Calls .................................................. 250
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite
................................................ 246
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress ....................................... 249
Managing Your Favorites.......................... 247
Natural Speech......................................... 243
Operation ................................................. 242
Overview................................................... 241
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
................................................... 243
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device
.................................................. 245
Phonebook Download............................... 246
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............... 249
Power-Up .................................................. 252
Recent Calls.............................................. 248
Redial ....................................................... 250
To Remove A Favorite ............................... 247
Toggling Between Calls............................. 249
Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 248
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone.. 250
Voice Command ....................................... 250
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features
................................. 22, 26, 211
Passive Entry Programming .........................26
Uconnect System .......................................... 225
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 420
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector
........................................................62
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOME-
LINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
..............................45
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................... 309
V
Vanity Mirrors
...................................................44
Vehicle Finder ...................................... 269, 276
Vehicle Health Alert....................................... 272
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 272
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 431
Vehicle Loading.................................... 192, 408
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 372
457
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations
.................... 11
Vehicle Notifications......................................272
Vehicle Storage .............................................421
Voice Command ............................42, 254, 256
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 42
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
.................................................126
Warnings, Roll Over ......................................... 10
Warranty Information.....................................445
WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................445
Washers, Windshield .....................................371
Washing Vehicle ............................................422
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel................................................ 375
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 417
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 417
Wi-fi............................................................... 270
Wind Buffeting .................................................68
Window Fogging...............................................60
Window Storage...............................................77
Windows ..........................................................67
Power ..........................................................67
Windshield
Folding...................................................... 100
Windshield Defroster .................................... 341
Windshield Washers .............................. 52, 371
Fluid.......................................................... 371
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 382
Windshield Wipers ...........................................52
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 382
Wipers, Rear ....................................................53
11
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
®
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
21_JL_OM_EN_USC
Second Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
